updated for version 7.0122

Filelist

@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ SRC_ALL1 =	\
 		src/gui.h \
 		src/gui_beval.c \
 		src/gui_beval.h \
+		src/hardcopy.c \
 		src/hashtable.c \
 		src/keymap.h \
 		src/macros.h \
@@ -94,6 +95,7 @@ SRC_ALL2 =	\
 		src/proto/getchar.pro \
 		src/proto/gui.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_beval.pro \
+		src/proto/hardcopy.pro \
 		src/proto/hashtable.pro \
 		src/proto/main.pro \
 		src/proto/mark.pro \
@@ -122,8 +124,6 @@ SRC_ALL2 =	\
 		src/proto/undo.pro \
 		src/proto/version.pro \
 		src/proto/window.pro \
-		src/spell/*.diff \
-		src/spell/Makefile \
 
 
 # source files for Unix only
@@ -511,6 +511,8 @@ RT_SCRIPTS =	\
 		runtime/delmenu.vim \
 		runtime/synmenu.vim \
 		runtime/makemenu.vim \
+		runtime/autoload/*.vim \
+		runtime/autoload/README.txt \
 		runtime/colors/*.vim \
 		runtime/colors/README.txt \
 		runtime/compiler/*.vim \
@@ -684,9 +686,13 @@ LANG_GEN = \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.ru.* \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.zh.* \
 		runtime/spell/README.txt \
+		runtime/spell/??/*.diff \
+		runtime/spell/??/main.aap \
+		runtime/spell/main.aap \
 
 # generic language files, binary
 LANG_GEN_BIN = \
+		runtime/spell/README_en.txt \
 		runtime/spell/en.ascii.spl \
 		runtime/spell/en.latin1.spl \
 		runtime/spell/en.utf-8.spl \
@@ -698,6 +704,7 @@ LANG_SRC = \
 		src/po/README_mvc.txt \
 		src/po/cleanup.vim \
 		src/po/Makefile \
+		src/po/Make_cyg.mak \
 		src/po/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/po/Make_mvc.mak \
 		src/po/sjiscorr.c \

README_vms.txt

@@ -14,27 +14,34 @@ To compile Vim yourself you need three archives:
   vim-X.X-extra.tar.gz	extra source files
 
 Compilation is recommended, in order to make sure that the correct
-libraries are used for your specific system.  However, you might not be
-able to compile Vim, read more from src/INSTALLvms.txt.
+libraries are used for your specific system.  Read about compiling in
+src/INSTALLvms.txt.
 
 To use the binary version, you need one of these archives:
 
-  vim-XX-exe-alpha-gui.zip	Alpha GUI/Motif executables
-  vim-XX-exe-alpha-gtk.zip      Alpha GUI/GTK executables
-  vim-XX-exe-alpha-term.zip	Alpha console executables
+  vim-XX-exe-ia64-gui.zip       IA64 GUI/Motif executables
+  vim-XX-exe-ia64-gtk.zip       IA64 GUI/GTK executables
+  vim-XX-exe-ia64-term.zip      IA64 console executables
+  vim-XX-exe-axp-gui.zip        Alpha GUI/Motif executables
+  vim-XX-exe-axp-gtk.zip        Alpha GUI/GTK executables
+  vim-XX-exe-axp-term.zip       Alpha console executables
   vim-XX-exe-vax-gui.zip	VAX GUI executables
-  vim-XX-exe-vax-term.zip	VAX console executables
+  vim-XX-exe-vax-term.zip       VAX console executables
 
 and of course
   vim-XX-runtime.zip		runtime files
 
-The binary archives contain: vim.exe, ctags.exe, xxd.exe, mms_vim.exe files,
+The binary archives contain: vim.exe, ctags.exe, xxd.exe files,
 but there are also prepared "deploy ready" archives:
 
-vim-XX-alpha.zip		GUI and console executables with runtime and
-				help files for Alpha systems
-vim-XX-vax.zip			GUI and console executables with runtime and
-				help files for VAX systems
+vim-XX-ia64.zip                 GUI and console executables with runtime and
+                                help files for IA64 systems
+vim-XX-axp.zip                  GUI and console executables with runtime and
+                                help files for Alpha systems
+vim-XX-vax.zip                  GUI and console executables with runtime and
+                                help files for VAX systems
+
+GTK builds need LIBGTK library installed.
 
 These executables and up to date patches for OpenVMS system are downloadable
 from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/ or ftp://ftp.polarhome.com/pub/vim/

runtime/autoload/README.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+The autoload directory is for standard Vim autoload scripts.
+
+These are functions used by plugins and for general use.  They will be loaded
+automatically when the function is invoked.  See ":help autoload".
+
+gzip.vim	for editing compressed files

runtime/autoload/gzip.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+" Vim autoload file for editing compressed files.
+" Maintainer: Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+" Last Change: 2005 Jul 26
+
+" These functions are used by the gzip plugin.
+
+" Function to check that executing "cmd [-f]" works.
+" The result is cached in s:have_"cmd" for speed.
+fun s:check(cmd)
+  let name = substitute(a:cmd, '\(\S*\).*', '\1', '')
+  if !exists("s:have_" . name)
+    let e = executable(name)
+    if e < 0
+      let r = system(name . " --version")
+      let e = (r !~ "not found" && r != "")
+    endif
+    exe "let s:have_" . name . "=" . e
+  endif
+  exe "return s:have_" . name
+endfun
+
+" Set b:gzip_comp_arg to the gzip argument to be used for compression, based on
+" the flags in the compressed file.
+" The only compression methods that can be detected are max speed (-1) and max
+" compression (-9).
+fun s:set_compression(line)
+  " get the Compression Method
+  let l:cm = char2nr(a:line[2])
+  " if it's 8 (DEFLATE), we can check for the compression level
+  if l:cm == 8
+    " get the eXtra FLags
+    let l:xfl = char2nr(a:line[8])
+    " max compression
+    if l:xfl == 2
+      let b:gzip_comp_arg = "-9"
+    " min compression
+    elseif l:xfl == 4
+      let b:gzip_comp_arg = "-1"
+    endif
+  endif
+endfun
+
+
+" After reading compressed file: Uncompress text in buffer with "cmd"
+fun gzip#read(cmd)
+  " don't do anything if the cmd is not supported
+  if !s:check(a:cmd)
+    return
+  endif
+
+  " for gzip check current compression level and set b:gzip_comp_arg.
+  silent! unlet b:gzip_comp_arg
+  if a:cmd[0] == 'g'
+    call s:set_compression(getline(1))
+  endif
+
+  " make 'patchmode' empty, we don't want a copy of the written file
+  let pm_save = &pm
+  set pm=
+  " remove 'a' and 'A' from 'cpo' to avoid the alternate file changes
+  let cpo_save = &cpo
+  set cpo-=a cpo-=A
+  " set 'modifiable'
+  let ma_save = &ma
+  setlocal ma
+  " when filtering the whole buffer, it will become empty
+  let empty = line("'[") == 1 && line("']") == line("$")
+  let tmp = tempname()
+  let tmpe = tmp . "." . expand("<afile>:e")
+  " write the just read lines to a temp file "'[,']w tmp.gz"
+  execute "silent '[,']w " . tmpe
+  " uncompress the temp file: call system("gzip -dn tmp.gz")
+  call system(a:cmd . " " . tmpe)
+  if !filereadable(tmp)
+    " uncompress didn't work!  Keep the compressed file then.
+    echoerr "Error: Could not read uncompressed file"
+    return
+  endif
+  " delete the compressed lines; remember the line number
+  let l = line("'[") - 1
+  if exists(":lockmarks")
+    lockmarks '[,']d _
+  else
+    '[,']d _
+  endif
+  " read in the uncompressed lines "'[-1r tmp"
+  setlocal nobin
+  if exists(":lockmarks")
+    execute "silent lockmarks " . l . "r " . tmp
+  else
+    execute "silent " . l . "r " . tmp
+  endif
+
+  " if buffer became empty, delete trailing blank line
+  if empty
+    silent $delete _
+    1
+  endif
+  " delete the temp file and the used buffers
+  call delete(tmp)
+  silent! exe "bwipe " . tmp
+  silent! exe "bwipe " . tmpe
+  let &pm = pm_save
+  let &cpo = cpo_save
+  let &l:ma = ma_save
+  " When uncompressed the whole buffer, do autocommands
+  if empty
+    if &verbose >= 8
+      execute "doau BufReadPost " . expand("%:r")
+    else
+      execute "silent! doau BufReadPost " . expand("%:r")
+    endif
+  endif
+endfun
+
+" After writing compressed file: Compress written file with "cmd"
+fun gzip#write(cmd)
+  " don't do anything if the cmd is not supported
+  if s:check(a:cmd)
+    " Rename the file before compressing it.
+    let nm = resolve(expand("<afile>"))
+    let nmt = s:tempname(nm)
+    if rename(nm, nmt) == 0
+      if exists("b:gzip_comp_arg")
+	call system(a:cmd . " " . b:gzip_comp_arg . " " . nmt)
+      else
+	call system(a:cmd . " " . nmt)
+      endif
+      call rename(nmt . "." . expand("<afile>:e"), nm)
+    endif
+  endif
+endfun
+
+" Before appending to compressed file: Uncompress file with "cmd"
+fun gzip#appre(cmd)
+  " don't do anything if the cmd is not supported
+  if s:check(a:cmd)
+    let nm = expand("<afile>")
+
+    " for gzip check current compression level and set b:gzip_comp_arg.
+    silent! unlet b:gzip_comp_arg
+    if a:cmd[0] == 'g'
+      call s:set_compression(readfile(nm, "b", 1)[0])
+    endif
+
+    " Rename to a weird name to avoid the risk of overwriting another file
+    let nmt = expand("<afile>:p:h") . "/X~=@l9q5"
+    let nmte = nmt . "." . expand("<afile>:e")
+    if rename(nm, nmte) == 0
+      if &patchmode != "" && getfsize(nm . &patchmode) == -1
+	" Create patchmode file by creating the decompressed file new
+	call system(a:cmd . " -c " . nmte . " > " . nmt)
+	call rename(nmte, nm . &patchmode)
+      else
+	call system(a:cmd . " " . nmte)
+      endif
+      call rename(nmt, nm)
+    endif
+  endif
+endfun
+
+" find a file name for the file to be compressed.  Use "name" without an
+" extension if possible.  Otherwise use a weird name to avoid overwriting an
+" existing file.
+fun s:tempname(name)
+  let fn = fnamemodify(a:name, ":r")
+  if !filereadable(fn) && !isdirectory(fn)
+    return fn
+  endif
+  return fnamemodify(a:name, ":p:h") . "/X~=@l9q5"
+endfun
+
+" vim: set sw=2 :

runtime/autoload/tar.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+" vim:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
+"
+" tar.vim -- a Vim plugin for browsing tarfiles
+" Copyright (c) 2002, Michael C. Toren <mct@toren.net>
+" Distributed under the GNU General Public License.
+"
+" Version: 1.01
+" Last Change: 2005 Jul 26
+"
+" Updates are available from <http://michael.toren.net/code/>.  If you
+" find this script useful, or have suggestions for improvements, please
+" let me know.
+" Also look there for further comments and documentation.
+"
+" This part defines the functions.  The autocommands are in plugin/tar.vim.
+
+let s:version = "1.01"
+
+function! tar#Write(argument)
+    echo "ERROR: Sorry, no write support for tarfiles yet"
+endfunction
+
+function! tar#Read(argument, cleanup)
+    let l:argument = a:argument
+    let l:argument = substitute(l:argument, '^tarfile:', '', '')
+    let l:argument = substitute(l:argument, '^\~', $HOME, '')
+
+    let l:tarfile = l:argument
+    while 1
+	if (l:tarfile == "" || l:tarfile == "/")
+	    echo "ERROR: Could not find a readable tarfile in path:" l:argument
+	    return
+	endif
+
+	if filereadable(l:tarfile) " found it!
+	    break
+	endif
+
+	let l:tarfile = fnamemodify(l:tarfile, ":h")
+    endwhile
+
+    let l:toextract = strpart(l:argument, strlen(l:tarfile) + 1)
+
+    if (l:toextract == "")
+	return
+    endif
+
+    let l:cat = s:TarCatCommand(l:tarfile)
+    execute "r !" . l:cat . " < '" . l:tarfile . "'"
+	\ " | tar OPxf - '" . l:toextract . "'"
+
+    if (a:cleanup)
+	0d "blank line
+	execute "doautocmd BufReadPost " . expand("%")
+	setlocal readonly
+	silent preserve
+    endif
+endfunction
+
+function! tar#Browse(tarfile)
+    setlocal noswapfile
+    setlocal buftype=nofile
+    setlocal bufhidden=hide
+    setlocal filetype=
+    setlocal nobuflisted
+    setlocal buftype=nofile
+    setlocal wrap
+    setlocal syntax=tar
+
+    let l:tarfile = a:tarfile
+    let b:tarfile = l:tarfile
+    let l:cat = s:TarCatCommand(l:tarfile)
+
+    if ! filereadable(l:tarfile)
+	let l:tarfile = substitute(l:tarfile, '^tarfile:', '', '')
+    endif
+
+    if ! filereadable(l:tarfile)
+	echo "ERROR: File not readable:" l:tarfile
+	return
+    endif
+
+    call s:Say("\" tar.vim version " . s:version)
+    call s:Say("\" Browsing tarfile " . l:tarfile)
+    call s:Say("\" Hit ENTER to view a file in a new window")
+    call s:Say("")
+
+    silent execute "r!" . l:cat . "<'" . l:tarfile . "'| tar Ptf - "
+    0d "blank line
+    /^$/1
+
+    setlocal readonly
+    setlocal nomodifiable
+    noremap <silent> <buffer> <cr> :call <SID>TarBrowseSelect()<cr>
+endfunction
+
+function! s:TarBrowseSelect()
+    let l:line = getline(".")
+
+    if (l:line =~ '^" ')
+	return
+    endif
+
+    if (l:line =~ '/$')
+	echo "Please specify a file, not a directory"
+	return
+    endif
+
+    let l:selection = "tarfile:" .  b:tarfile . "/" . l:line
+    new
+    wincmd _
+    execute "e " . l:selection
+endfunction
+
+" kludge to deal with compressed archives
+function! s:TarCatCommand(tarfile)
+    if a:tarfile =~# '\.\(gz\|tgz\|Z\)$'
+	let l:cat = "gzip -d -c"
+    elseif a:tarfile =~# '\.bz2$'
+	let l:cat = "bzip2 -d -c"
+    else
+	let l:cat = "cat"
+    endif
+    return l:cat
+endfunction
+
+function! s:Say(string)
+    let @" = a:string
+    $ put
+endfunction

runtime/bugreport.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 :" information about the environment of a possible bug in Vim.
 :"
 :" Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-:" Last change:	2001 Feb 02
+:" Last change:	2005 Jun 12
 :"
 :" To use inside Vim:
 :"	:so $VIMRUNTIME/bugreport.vim
@@ -49,6 +49,8 @@
 :  call <SID>CheckFile($VIMRUNTIME . "/syntax/synload.vim")
 :  delfun <SID>CheckDir
 :  delfun <SID>CheckFile
+:  echo "--- Scripts sourced ---"
+:  scriptnames
 :endif
 :set all
 :set termcap

runtime/compiler/bdf.vim

@@ -1,30 +1,22 @@
 " Vim compiler file
-" Compiler:	    BDF to PCF Conversion
-" Maintainer:	    Nikolai Weibull <sourc@pcppopper.org>
-" URL:		    http://www.pcppopper.org/vim/compiler/pcp/bdf/
-" Latest Revision:  2004-05-22
-" arch-tag:	    2e2f3a55-199b-468c-aa2e-d6b1a7b87806
+" Compiler:         BDF to PCF Conversion
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-29
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "bdf"
 
-if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2          " older Vim always used :setlocal
-  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
-endif
-
 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo-=C
 
-CompilerSet makeprg=bdftopcf\ $*
+setlocal makeprg=bdftopcf\ $*
 
-CompilerSet errorformat=%ABDF\ %trror\ on\ line\ %l:\ %m,
+setlocal errorformat=%ABDF\ %trror\ on\ line\ %l:\ %m,
       \%-Z%p^,
       \%Cbdftopcf:\ bdf\ input\\,\ %f\\,\ corrupt,
       \%-G%.%#
 
 let &cpo = s:cpo_save
 unlet s:cpo_save
-
-" vim: set sts=2 sw=2:

runtime/compiler/gcc.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:         GNU C Compiler
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-29
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "gcc"
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+setlocal errorformat=
+      \%*[^\"]\"%f\"%*\\D%l:\ %m,
+      \\"%f\"%*\\D%l:\ %m,
+      \%-G%f:%l:\ %trror:\ (Each\ undeclared\ identifier\ is\ reported\ only\ once,
+      \%-G%f:%l:\ %trror:\ for\ each\ function\ it\ appears\ in.),
+      \%f:%l:\ %m,
+      \\"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l%*\\D%c%*[^\ ]\ %m,
+      \%D%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Entering\ directory\ `%f',
+      \%X%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Leaving\ directory\ `%f',
+      \%DMaking\ %*\\a\ in\ %f
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/compiler/msvc.vim

@@ -1,17 +1,13 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	Miscrosoft Visual C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 19
+" Last Change:	2005 Jun 22
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "msvc"
 
-if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
-  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
-endif
-
 " The errorformat for MSVC is the default.
-CompilerSet errorformat&
-CompilerSet makeprg=nmake
+setlocal errorformat&
+setlocal makeprg=nmake

runtime/compiler/rst.vim

@@ -1,23 +1,17 @@
 " Vim compiler file
-" Compiler:	    reStructuredText Documentation Format
-" Maintainer:	    Nikolai Weibull <source@pcppopper.org>
-" URL:		    http://www.pcppopper.org/vim/compiler/pcp/rst/
-" Latest Revision:  2004-05-22
-" arch-tag:	    ac64a95a-5d45-493d-a9f9-f96fc8568657
+" Compiler:         reStructuredText Documentation Format
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-29
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "rst"
 
-if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2          " older Vim always used :setlocal
-  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
-endif
-
 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo-=C
 
-CompilerSet errorformat=
+setlocal errorformat=
       \%f:%l:\ (%tEBUG/0)\ %m,
       \%f:%l:\ (%tNFO/1)\ %m,
       \%f:%l:\ (%tARNING/2)\ %m,
@@ -29,5 +23,3 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
 
 let &cpo = s:cpo_save
 unlet s:cpo_save
-
-" vim: set sts=2 sw=2:

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 04
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ VimLeave			Before exiting Vim, just after writing the
 				VimLeavePre.
 				To detect an abnormal exit use |v:dying|.
 							*EncodingChanged*
-EncodingChanged			Fires off when the 'encoding' option is
+EncodingChanged			Fires off after the 'encoding' option has been
 				changed.  Useful to set up fonts, for example.
 							*InsertEnter*
 InsertEnter			When starting Insert mode.  Also for Replace
@@ -542,6 +542,18 @@ QuickFixCmdPre						*QuickFixCmdPre*
 QuickFixCmdPost						*QuickFixCmdPost*
 				like QuickFixCmdPre, but after a quickfix
 				command is run.
+							*MenuPopup*
+MenuPopup			Just before showing the popup menu (under the
+				right mouse button).  Useful for adjusting the
+				menu for what is under the cursor or mouse
+				pointer.
+				The pattern is matched against a single
+				character representing the mode:
+					n	Normal
+					v	Visual
+					o	Operator-pending
+					i	Insert
+					c	Commmand line
 							*UserGettingBored*
 UserGettingBored		When the user hits CTRL-C.  Just kidding! :-)
 							*User*

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 26
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ commands with the "." command.
    4.4 Changing tabs		   |change-tabs|
 5. Copying and moving text	|copy-move|
 6. Formatting text		|formatting|
+7. Sorting text			|sorting|
 
 For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 
@@ -681,8 +682,8 @@ For the definition of a pattern, see |pattern|.
 
 					*sub-replace-special* *:s\=*
 When the {string} starts with "\=" it is evaluated as an expression, see
-|sub-replace-expression|.  Otherwise these characters in {string} have a
-special meaning:
+|sub-replace-expression|.  You can use that for any special characters.
+Otherwise these characters in {string} have a special meaning:
 								*:s%*
 When {string} is equal to "%" and '/' is included with the 'cpotions' option,
 then the {string} of the previous substitute command is used. |cpo-/|
@@ -770,9 +771,12 @@ Be careful: The separation character must not appear in the expression!
 Consider using a character like "@" or ":".  There is no problem if the result
 of the expression contains the separation character.
 
-Example: >
+Examples: >
 	:s@\n@\="\r" . expand("$HOME") . "\r"@
-This replaces an end-of-line with a new line containing the value of $HOME.
+This replaces an end-of-line with a new line containing the value of $HOME. >
+
+	s/E/\="\<Char-0x20ac>"/g
+This replaces 'E' characters with an euro sign. Read more in |<Char->|.
 
 
 4.3 Search and replace					*search-replace*
@@ -1073,9 +1077,12 @@ normal command-line editing commands are available, including a special
 history for expressions.  When you end the command-line by typing <CR>, Vim
 computes the result of the expression.  If you end it with <Esc>, Vim abandons
 the expression.  If you do not enter an expression, Vim uses the previous
-expression (like with the "/" command).  If the "= register is used for the
-"p" command, the string is split up at <NL> characters.  If the string ends in
-a <NL>, it is regarded as a linewise register.  {not in Vi}
+expression (like with the "/" command).  The expression must evaluate to a
+string.  If the result is a number it's turned into a string.  A List,
+Dictionary or FuncRef results in an error message (use string() to convert).
+If the "= register is used for the "p" command, the string is split up at <NL>
+characters.  If the string ends in a <NL>, it is regarded as a linewise
+register.  {not in Vi}
 
 7. Selection and drop registers "*, "+ and "~ 
 Use these register for storing and retrieving the selected text for the GUI.
@@ -1479,5 +1486,52 @@ And a few warnings:
 
 - Formatting a long paragraph and/or with complicated indenting may be slow.
 
+==============================================================================
+7. Sorting text						*sorting*
+
+Vim has a sorting function and a sorting command.  The sorting function can be
+found here: |sort()|.
+
+							*:sor* *:sort*
+:[range]sor[t][!] [i] [u] [/{pattern}/]
+			Sort lines in [range].
+
+			With [!] the order is reversed.
+
+			With [i] case is ignored.
+
+			With [n] sorting is done on the first decimal number
+			in the line (after a {pattern} match).
+
+			With [x] sorting is done on the first hexadecimal
+			number in the line (after a {pattern} match).  A
+			leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored.
+
+			With [o] sorting is done on the first octal number in
+			the line (after a {pattern} match).
+
+			With [u] only keep the first of a sequence of
+			identical lines (ignoring case when [i] is used).
+			Note that leading and trailing white space may cause
+			lines to be different.
+
+			When /{pattern}/ is specified the text matched with
+			{pattern} is skipped, so that you sort on what comes
+			after the match.  For lines without a match sorting
+			starts in the first column (e.g., for empty lines).
+			Instead of the slash any non-letter can be used.
+			For example, to sort on the second comma-separated
+			field: >
+				:sort /[^,]*,/
+<			To sort on the text at virtual column 10 (thus
+			ignoring the difference between tabs and spaces): >
+				:sort /.*\%10v/
+<
+Note that using ":sort" with ":global" doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
+quite useless.
+
+The details about sorting depend on the library function used.  There is no
+guarantee that sorting is "stable" or obeys the current locale.  You will have
+to try it out.
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Feb 14
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -726,7 +726,7 @@ Note: these are typed literally, they are not special keys!
 		   effective buffer number (for ":r file" it is the current
 		   buffer, the file being read is not in a buffer).
 	<amatch>   when executing autocommands, is replaced with the match for
-		   which this autocommand was executed.  It differs form
+		   which this autocommand was executed.  It differs from
 		   <afile> only when the file name isn't used to match with
 		   (for FileType and Syntax events).
 	<sfile>    when executing a ":source" command, is replaced with the

runtime/doc/develop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jun 13
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -375,16 +375,18 @@ checking engine in Vim, for various reasons:
 
 - Missing support for multi-byte encodings.  At least UTF-8 must be supported,
   so that more than one language can be used in the same file.
+  Doing on-the-fly conversion is not always possible (would require iconv
+  support).
 - For the programs and libraries: Using them as-is would require installing
-  them separately from Vim.  That's not impossible, but a drawback.
+  them separately from Vim.  That's mostly not impossible, but a drawback.
 - Performance: A few tests showed that it's possible to check spelling on the
   fly (while redrawing), just like syntax highlighting.  But the mechanisms
   used by other code are much slower.  Myspell uses a simplistic hashtable,
   for example.
-- For a program like aspell a communication mechanism would have to be setup.
-  That's complicated to do in a portable way (Unix-only would be relatively
-  simple, but that's not good enough).  And performance will become a problem
-  (lots of process switching involved).
+- For using an external program like aspell a communication mechanism would
+  have to be setup.  That's complicated to do in a portable way (Unix-only
+  would be relatively simple, but that's not good enough).  And performance
+  will become a problem (lots of process switching involved).
 - Missing support for words with non-word characters, such as "Etten-Leur" and
   "et al.", would require marking the pieces of them OK, lowering the
   reliability.
@@ -392,7 +394,9 @@ checking engine in Vim, for various reasons:
   all English words and highlight non-Canadian words differently.
 - Missing support for rare words.  Many words are correct but hardly ever used
   and could be a misspelled often-used word.
-
+- For making suggestions the speed is less important and requiring to install
+  another program or library would be acceptable.  But the word lists probably
+  differ, the suggestions may be wrong words.
 
 ==============================================================================
 4. Assumptions						*design-assumptions*

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 27
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -354,14 +354,32 @@ file1 file2") embedded spaces must be escaped with a backslash.
 							*wildcard*
 Wildcards in {file} are expanded.  Which wildcards are supported depends on
 the system.  These are the common ones:
-	*	matches anything, including nothing
 	?	matches one character
+	*	matches anything, including nothing
+	**	matches anything, including nothing, recurses into directories
 	[abc]	match 'a', 'b' or 'c'
+
 To avoid the special meaning of the wildcards prepend a backslash.  However,
 on MS-Windows the backslash is a path separator and "path\[abc]" is still seen
 as a wildcard when "[" is in the 'isfname' option.  A simple way to avoid this
 is to use "path\[[]abc]".  Then the file "path[abc]" literally.
 
+					*starstar-wildcard*
+Expanding "**" is possible on Unix, Win32, Mac OS/X and a few other systems.
+This allows searching a directory tree.  This goes up to 100 directories deep.
+Example: >
+	:n **/*.txt
+Finds files:
+	ttt.txt
+	subdir/ttt.txt
+	a/b/c/d/ttt.txt
+When non-wildcard characters are used these are only matched in the first
+directory.  Example: >
+	:n /usr/inc**/*.h
+Finds files:
+	/usr/include/types.h
+	/usr/include/sys/types.h
+	/usr/inc_old/types.h
 					*backtick-expansion* *`-expansion*
 On Unix and a few other systems you can also use backticks in the file name,
 for example: >
@@ -563,7 +581,9 @@ list of the current window.
 			current entry.
 			This command keeps the currently edited file, also
 			when it's deleted from the argument list.
-			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			Example: >
+				:argdel *.obj
+<			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
 			|+listcmds| feature}
 
 :{range}argd[elete]	Delete the {range} files from the argument list.
@@ -1404,7 +1424,7 @@ problem goes away the next day.
 The file searching is currently used for the 'path', 'cdpath' and 'tags'
 options.  There are three different types of searching:
 
-1) Downward search:
+1) Downward search:					*starstar*
    Downward search uses the wildcards '*', '**' and possibly others
    supported by your operating system.  '*' and '**' are handled inside Vim, so
    they work on all operating systems.

runtime/doc/eval.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 May 18
+*eval.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Aug 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ done, the features in this document are not available.  See |+eval| and
 
 1.1 Variable types ~
 							*E712*
-There are four types of variables:
+There are five types of variables:
 
 Number		A 32 bit signed number.
 		Examples:  -123  0x10  0177
@@ -50,6 +50,10 @@ Funcref		A reference to a function |Funcref|.
 List		An ordered sequence of items |List|.
 		Example: [1, 2, ['a', 'b']]
 
+Dictionary	An associative, unordered array: Each entry has a key and a
+		value. |Dictionary|
+		Example: {'blue': "#0000ff", 'red': "#ff0000"}
+
 The Number and String types are converted automatically, depending on how they
 are used.
 
@@ -235,6 +239,26 @@ the same value. >
 	:echo alist == blist
 <	1
 
+Note about comparing lists: Two lists are considered equal if they have the
+same length and all items compare equal, as with using "==".  There is one
+exception: When comparing a number with a string they are considered
+different.  There is no automatic type conversion, as with using "==" on
+variables.  Example: >
+	echo 4 == "4"
+<	1 >
+	echo [4] == ["4"]
+<	0
+
+Thus comparing Lists is more strict than comparing numbers and strings.  You
+can compare simple values this way too by putting them in a string: >
+
+	:let a = 5
+	:let b = "5"
+	echo a == b
+<	1 >
+	echo [a] == [b]
+<	0
+
 
 List unpack ~
 
@@ -428,7 +452,8 @@ Dictionary: >
 	:echo onedict['a']
 	11
 
-For more info see |list-identity|.
+Two Dictionaries compare equal if all the key-value pairs compare equal.  For
+more info see |list-identity|.
 
 
 Dictionary modification ~
@@ -935,8 +960,11 @@ register						*expr-register*
 
 The result is the contents of the named register, as a single string.
 Newlines are inserted where required.  To get the contents of the unnamed
-register use @" or @@.  The '=' register can not be used here.  See
-|registers| for an explanation of the available registers.
+register use @" or @@.  See |registers| for an explanation of the available
+registers.
+
+When using the '=' register you get the expression itself, not what it
+evaluates to.  Use |eval()| to evaluate it.
 
 
 nesting							*expr-nesting* *E110*
@@ -1127,10 +1155,10 @@ v:beval_lnum	The number of the line, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
 		valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
 
 					*v:beval_text* *beval_text-variable*
-v:beval_text	The text under or after the mouse pointer.  Usually a word as it is
-		useful for debugging a C program.  'iskeyword' applies, but a
-		dot and "->" before the position is included.  When on a ']'
-		the text before it is used, including the matching '[' and
+v:beval_text	The text under or after the mouse pointer.  Usually a word as
+		it is useful for debugging a C program.  'iskeyword' applies,
+		but a dot and "->" before the position is included.  When on a
+		']' the text before it is used, including the matching '[' and
 		word before it.  When on a Visual area within one line the
 		highlighted text is used.
 		Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
@@ -1483,6 +1511,8 @@ foreground( )			Number	bring the Vim window to the foreground
 function( {name})		Funcref reference to function {name}
 get( {list}, {idx} [, {def}])	any	get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
 get( {dict}, {key} [, {def}])	any	get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
+getbufline( {expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
+				List	lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {expr}
 getchar( [expr])		Number	get one character from the user
 getcharmod( )			Number	modifiers for the last typed character
 getbufvar( {expr}, {varname})		variable {varname} in buffer {expr}
@@ -1497,7 +1527,7 @@ getftype( {fname})		String	description of type of file {fname}
 getline( {lnum})		String	line {lnum} of current buffer
 getline( {lnum}, {end})		List	lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer
 getqflist()			List	list of quickfix items
-getreg( [{regname}])		String	contents of register
+getreg( [{regname} [, 1]])	String	contents of register
 getregtype( [{regname}])	String	type of register
 getwinposx()			Number	X coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
 getwinposy()			Number	Y coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
@@ -1555,6 +1585,7 @@ mode()				String	current editing mode
 nextnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
 nr2char( {expr})		String	single char with ASCII value {expr}
 prevnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
+printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...)	String  format text
 range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
 				List	items from {expr} to {max}
 readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
@@ -1582,12 +1613,16 @@ serverlist()			String	get a list of available servers
 setbufvar( {expr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val}
 setcmdpos( {pos})		Number	set cursor position in command-line
 setline( {lnum}, {line})	Number	set line {lnum} to {line}
-setqflist( {list} )		Number	set list of quickfix items using {list}
+setqflist( {list}[, {action}])	Number	set list of quickfix items using {list}
 setreg( {n}, {v}[, {opt}])	Number	set register to value and type
 setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
 simplify( {filename})		String	simplify filename as much as possible
 sort( {list} [, {func}])	List	sort {list}, using {func} to compare
-split( {expr} [, {pat}])	List	make List from {pat} separated {expr}
+soundfold( {word})		String	sound-fold {word}
+spellbadword()			String	badly spelled word at cursor
+spellsuggest({word} [, {max}])	List	spelling suggestions
+split( {expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
+				List	make List from {pat} separated {expr}
 strftime( {format}[, {time}])	String	time in specified format
 stridx( {haystack}, {needle}[, {start}])
 				Number	index of {needle} in {haystack}
@@ -2187,8 +2222,11 @@ expand({expr} [, {flag}])				*expand()*
 		expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line.
 		'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional
 		{flag} argument is given and it is non-zero.  Names for
-		non-existing files are included.
-
+		non-existing files are included.  The "**" item can be used to
+		search in a directory tree.  For example, to find all "README"
+		files in the current directory and below: >
+			:echo expand("**/README")
+<
 		Expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment
 		variables that are only known in a shell.  But this can be
 		slow, because a shell must be started.  See |expr-env-expand|.
@@ -2357,6 +2395,17 @@ function({name})					*function()* *E700*
 		{name} can be a user defined function or an internal function.
 
 
+garbagecollect()					*garbagecollect()*
+		Cleanup unused Lists and Dictionaries that have circular
+		references.  There is hardly ever a need to invoke this
+		function, as it is automatically done when Vim runs out of
+		memory or is waiting for the user to press a key after
+		'updatetime'.  Items without circular references are always
+		freed when they become unused.
+		This is useful if you have deleted a very big List and/or
+		Dictionary with circular references in a script that runs for
+		a long time.
+
 get({list}, {idx} [, {default}])			*get()*
 		Get item {idx} from List {list}.  When this item is not
 		available return {default}.  Return zero when {default} is
@@ -2366,6 +2415,30 @@ get({dict}, {key} [, {default}])
 		item is not available return {default}.  Return zero when
 		{default} is omitted.
 
+							*getbufline()*
+getbufline({expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
+		Return a List with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end}
+		(inclusive) in the buffer {expr}.  If {end} is omitted, a List
+		with only the line {lnum} is returned.
+
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+		For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the
+		buffer.  Otherwise a number must be used.
+
+		When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
+		lines in the buffer, an empty List is returned.
+
+		When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
+		it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the
+		buffer.  When {end} is before {lnum} an empty List is
+		returned.
+
+		This function works only for loaded buffers.  For unloaded and
+		non-existing buffers, an empty List is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$")
 
 getbufvar({expr}, {varname})				*getbufvar()*
 		The result is the value of option or local buffer variable
@@ -2529,7 +2602,7 @@ getline({lnum} [, {end}])
 		including line {end}.
 		{end} is used in the same way as {lnum}.
 		Non-existing lines are silently omitted.
-		When {end} is before {lnum} an error is given.
+		When {end} is before {lnum} an empty List is returned.
 		Example: >
 			:let start = line('.')
 			:let end = search("^$") - 1
@@ -2558,12 +2631,15 @@ getqflist()						*getqflist()*
 			:endfor
 
 
-getreg([{regname}])					*getreg()*
+getreg([{regname} [, 1]])				*getreg()*
 		The result is a String, which is the contents of register
 		{regname}.  Example: >
 			:let cliptext = getreg('*')
 <		getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression
 		register.  (For use in maps.)
+		getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can
+		be restored with |setreg()|.  For other registers the extra
+		argument is ignored, thus you can always give it.
 		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
 
 
@@ -2577,7 +2653,6 @@ getregtype([{regname}])					*getregtype()*
 		<CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16.
 		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
 
-
 							*getwinposx()*
 getwinposx()	The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of
 		the left hand side of the GUI Vim window.  The result will be
@@ -2590,7 +2665,8 @@ getwinposy()	The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of
 
 getwinvar({nr}, {varname})				*getwinvar()*
 		The result is the value of option or local window variable
-		{varname} in window {nr}.
+		{varname} in window {nr}.  When {nr} is zero the current
+		window is used.
 		This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and
 		window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable
 		or buffer-local variable.
@@ -2631,6 +2707,11 @@ globpath({path}, {expr})				*globpath()*
 		The 'wildignore' option applies: Names matching one of the
 		patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped.
 
+		The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree.
+		For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories
+		in 'runtimepath' and below: >
+			:echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt")
+<
 							*has()*
 has({feature})	The result is a Number, which is 1 if the feature {feature} is
 		supported, zero otherwise.  The {feature} argument is a
@@ -3257,6 +3338,134 @@ nr2char({expr})						*nr2char()*
 		characters.  nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
 		string, thus results in an empty string.
 
+printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*
+		Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by
+		the formatted form of their respective arguments.  Example: >
+			printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg)
+<		May result in:
+			"  99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~
+
+		Often used items are:
+		  %s   	string
+		  %6s	string right-aligned in 6 characters
+		  %c    single byte
+		  %d    decimal number
+		  %5d   decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters
+		  %x    hex number
+		  %04x  hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters
+		  %X    hex number using upper case letters
+		  %o    octal number
+		  %%    the % character
+
+		Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the
+		conversion type.  All other characters are copied unchanged to
+		the result.
+
+		The "%" starts a conversion specification.  The following
+		arguments appear in sequence:
+
+			%  [flags]  [field-width]  [.precision]  type
+
+	        flags
+			Zero or more of the following flags:
+
+		    #	      The value should be converted to an "alternate
+			      form".  For c, d, and s conversions, this option
+			      has no effect.  For o conversions, the precision
+			      of the number is increased to force the first
+			      character of the output string to a zero (except
+			      if a zero value is printed with an explicit
+			      precision of zero).
+			      For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has
+			      the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions)
+			      prepended to it.
+
+		    0 (zero)  Zero padding.  For all conversions the converted
+			      value is padded on the left with zeros rather
+			      than blanks.  If a precision is given with a
+			      numeric conversion (d, o, x, and X), the 0 flag
+			      is ignored.
+
+		    -	      A negative field width flag; the converted value
+			      is to be left adjusted on the field boundary.
+			      The converted value is padded on the right with
+			      blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or
+			      zeros.  A - overrides a 0 if both are given.
+
+		    ' ' (space)  A blank should be left before a positive
+			      number produced by a signed conversion (d).
+
+		    +	      A sign must always be placed before a number
+			      produced by a signed conversion.  A + overrides
+			      a space if both are used.
+
+		field-width
+			An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum
+			field width.  If the converted value has fewer
+			characters than the field width, it will be padded
+			with spaces on the left (or right, if the
+			left-adjustment flag has been given) to fill out the
+			field width.
+
+		.precision
+			An optional precision, in the form of a period '.'
+			followed by an optional digit string.  If the digit
+			string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero.
+			This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for
+			d, o, x, and X conversions, or the maximum number of
+			characters to be printed from a string for s
+			conversions.
+
+		type
+			A character that specifies the type of conversion to
+			be applied, see below.
+
+		A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an
+		asterisk '*' instead of a digit string.  In this case, a
+		Number argument supplies the field width or precision.  A
+		negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag
+		followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is
+		treated as though it were missing.  Example: >
+			:echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line)
+<		This limits the length of the text used from "line" to
+		"width" bytes.
+
+	        The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+
+		doxX    The Number argument is converted to signed decimal
+			(d), unsigned octal (o), or unsigned hexadecimal (x
+			and X) notation.  The letters "abcdef" are used for
+			x conversions; the letters "ABCDEF" are used for X
+			conversions.
+			The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of
+			digits that must appear; if the converted value
+			requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with
+			zeros.
+			In no case does a non-existent or small field width
+			cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of
+			a conversion is wider than the field width, the field
+			is expanded to contain the conversion result.
+
+		c	The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the
+			resulting character is written.
+
+		s	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
+			precision is specified, no more bytes than the number
+			specified are used.
+
+		%	A '%' is written.  No argument is converted.  The
+			complete conversion specification is "%%".
+
+		Each argument can be Number or String and is converted
+		automatically to fit the conversion specifier.  Any other
+		argument type results in an error message.
+
+							*E766* *E767*
+		The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number
+		of "%" items.  If there are not sufficient or too many
+		arguments an error is given.  Up to 18 arguments can be used.
+
+
 prevnonblank({lnum})					*prevnonblank()*
 		Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum}
 		that is not blank.  Example: >
@@ -3273,11 +3482,16 @@ range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])				*range()*
 		- If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ...,
 		  {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not
 		  producing a value past {max}).
+		When the maximum is one before the start the result is an
+		empty list.  When the maximum is more than one before the
+		start this is an error.
 		Examples: >
 			range(4) 		" [0, 1, 2, 3]
 			range(2, 4)		" [2, 3, 4]
 			range(2, 9, 3)		" [2, 5, 8]
 			range(2, -2, -1) 	" [2, 1, 0, -1, -2]
+			range(0)		" []
+			range(2, 0)		" error!
 <
 							*readfile()*
 readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
@@ -3446,8 +3660,14 @@ search({pattern} [, {flags}])				*search()*
 		'n'	do Not move the cursor
 		'w'	wrap around the end of the file
 		'W'	don't wrap around the end of the file
+		's'	set the ' mark at the previous location of the
+			cursor.
 		If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies.
 
+		If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the
+		cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n'
+		flag.
+
 		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
 		The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n'
 		flag is used).
@@ -3598,13 +3818,22 @@ setcmdpos({pos})					*setcmdpos()*
 setline({lnum}, {line})					*setline()*
 		Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {line}.
 		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is just below the last line the {line} will be
+		added as a new line.
 		If this succeeds, 0 is returned.  If this fails (most likely
 		because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned.  Example: >
 			:call setline(5, strftime("%c"))
+<		When {line} is a List then line {lnum} and following lines
+		will be set to the items in the list.  Example: >
+			:call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
+<		This is equivalent to: >
+			:for [n, l] in [[5, 6, 7], ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']]
+			:  call setline(n, l)
+			:endfor
 <		Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
 
 
-setqflist({list})					*setqflist()*
+setqflist({list} [, {action}])				*setqflist()*
 		Creates a quickfix list using the items in {list}.  Each item
 		in {list} is a dictionary.  Non-dictionary items in {list} are
 		ignored.  Each dictionary item can contain the following
@@ -3629,6 +3858,13 @@ setqflist({list})					*setqflist()*
 		If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will
 		be used.
 
+		If {action} is set to 'a', then the items from {list} are
+		added to the existing quickfix list. If there is no existing
+		list, then a new list is created. If {action} is set to 'r',
+		then the items from the current quickfix list are replaced
+		with the items from {list}. If {action} is not present or is
+		set to ' ', then a new list is created.
+
 		Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
 
 		This function can be used to create a quickfix list
@@ -3662,7 +3898,7 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 
 <		This example shows using the functions to save and restore a
 		register. >
-			:let var_a = getreg('a')
+			:let var_a = getreg('a', 1)
 			:let var_amode = getregtype('a')
 			    ....
 			:call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode)
@@ -3673,7 +3909,7 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 
 setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val})			*setwinvar()*
 		Set option or local variable {varname} in window {nr} to
-		{val}.
+		{val}.  When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
 		This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it
 		doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable.
 		For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged.
@@ -3705,6 +3941,7 @@ sort({list} [, {func}])					*sort()* *E702*
 			:let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist))
 <		Uses the string representation of each item to sort on.
 		Numbers sort after Strings, Lists after Numbers.
+		For sorting text in the current buffer use |:sort|.
 		When {func} is given and it is one then case is ignored.
 		When {func} is a Funcref or a function name, this function is
 		called to compare items.  The function is invoked with two
@@ -3715,22 +3952,62 @@ sort({list} [, {func}])					*sort()* *E702*
 			   return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1
 			endfunc
 			let sortedlist = sort(mylist, "MyCompare")
+<
 
-split({expr} [, {pattern}])				*split()*
-		Make a List out of {expr}.  When {pattern} is omitted each
-		white-separated sequence of characters becomes an item.
+							*soundfold()*
+soundfold({word})
+		Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}.  Uses the first
+		language in 'spellang' for the current window that supports
+		soundfolding.  'spell' must be set.  When no sound folding is
+		possible the {word} is returned unmodified.
+		This can be used for making spelling suggestions.  Note that
+		the method can be quite slow.
+
+							*spellbadword()*
+spellbadword()	Return the badly spelled word under or after the cursor.
+		The cursor is advanced to the start of the bad word.
+		When no bad word is found in the cursor line an empty String
+		is returned and the cursor doesn't move.
+
+							*spellsuggest()*
+spellsuggest({word} [, {max}])
+		Return a List with spelling suggestions to replace {word}.
+		When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are
+		returned.  Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned.
+
+		{word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text.
+		This allows for joining two words that were split.  The
+		suggestions also include the following text, thus you can
+		replace a line.
+
+		{word} may also be a good word.  Similar words will then be
+		returned.  {word} itself is also included, most likely as the
+		first entry, thus this can be used to check spelling.
+
+		The spelling information for the current window is used.  The
+		'spell' option must be set and the values of 'spelllang' and
+		'spellsuggest' are used.
+
+
+split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]])			*split()*
+		Make a List out of {expr}.  When {pattern} is omitted or empty
+		each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an item.
 		Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches,
-		removing the matched characters.  Empty strings are omitted.
+		removing the matched characters.
+		When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the
+		{keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero.
+		Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one
+		character or when {keepempty} is non-zero.
 		Example: >
 			:let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+')
-<		Since empty strings are not added the "\+" isn't required but
-		it makes the function work a bit faster.
-		To split a string in individual characters: >
+<		To split a string in individual characters: >
 			:for c in split(mystring, '\zs')
 <		If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs': >
 			:echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs')
 <			['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~
-		The opposite function is |join()|.
+		Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: >
+			:let items = split(line, ':', 1)
+<		The opposite function is |join()|.
 
 
 strftime({format} [, {time}])				*strftime()*
@@ -3780,6 +4057,7 @@ string({expr})	Return {expr} converted to a String.  If {expr} is a Number,
 			Number		123
 			Funcref		function('name')
 			List		[item, item]
+			Dictionary	{key: value, key: value}
 		Note that in String values the ' character is doubled.
 
 							*strlen()*
@@ -3870,8 +4148,10 @@ synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans})				*synID()*
 		{lnum} and {col} in the current window.
 		The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and
 		|synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text.
+
 		{col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
-		line.
+		line.  'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned.
+
 		When {trans} is non-zero, transparent items are reduced to the
 		item that they reveal.  This is useful when wanting to know
 		the effective color.  When {trans} is zero, the transparent
@@ -3949,7 +4229,8 @@ system({expr} [, {input}])				*system()* *E677*
 
 taglist({expr})							*taglist()*
 		Returns a list of tags matching the regular expression {expr}.
-		Each list item is a dictionary with the following entries:
+		Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following
+		entries:
 			name		name of the tag.
 			filename	name of the file where the tag is
 					defined.
@@ -3968,7 +4249,7 @@ taglist({expr})							*taglist()*
 		information about these fields.  For C code the fields
 		"struct", "class" and "enum" may appear, they give the name of
 		the entity the tag is contained in.
- 
+
 		The ex-command 'cmd' can be either an ex search pattern, a
 		line number or a line number followed by a byte number.
 
@@ -4179,6 +4460,7 @@ arabic			Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|.
 arp			Compiled with ARP support (Amiga).
 autocmd			Compiled with autocommands support.
 balloon_eval		Compiled with |balloon-eval| support.
+balloon_multiline	GUI supports multiline balloons.
 beos			BeOS version of Vim.
 browse			Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will
 			work.
@@ -4223,7 +4505,6 @@ fork			Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system().
 gettext			Compiled with message translation |multi-lang|
 gui			Compiled with GUI enabled.
 gui_athena		Compiled with Athena GUI.
-gui_beos		Compiled with BeOS GUI.
 gui_gtk			Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version).
 gui_gtk2		Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
 gui_kde			Compiled with KDE GUI |KVim|
@@ -4286,7 +4567,8 @@ sniff			Compiled with SNiFF interface support.
 statusline		Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat'
 			and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'.
 sun_workshop		Compiled with support for Sun |workshop|.
-syntax			Compiled with syntax highlighting support.
+spell			Compiled with spell checking support |spell|.
+syntax			Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|.
 syntax_items		There are active syntax highlighting items for the
 			current buffer.
 system			Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec().
@@ -6361,7 +6643,7 @@ These items are not allowed in the sandbox:
 This is not guaranteed 100% secure, but it should block most attacks.
 
 							*:san* *:sandbox*
-:sandbox {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in the sandbox.  Useful to evaluate an
+:san[dbox] {cmd}	Execute {cmd} in the sandbox.  Useful to evaluate an
 			option that may have been set from a modeline, e.g.
 			'foldexpr'.
 

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 11
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@ Other GUI documentation:
 
 First you must make sure you actually have a version of Vim with the GUI code
 included.  You can check this with the ":version" command, it should include
-"+GUI_Athena", "+GUI_BeOS", "+GUI_GTK", "+GUI_KDE", "+GUI_Motif" or
-"MS-Windows ... bit GUI version".
+"+GUI_Athena", "+GUI_GTK", "+GUI_KDE", "+GUI_Motif" or "MS-Windows ... bit
+GUI version".
 
 How to start the GUI depends on the system used.  Mostly you can run the
 GUI version of Vim with:
@@ -736,9 +736,9 @@ from the main menu bar.  You must then use the |:popup| or |:tearoff| command
 to display it.
 
 							*popup-menu*
-In the Win32, KDE, GTK+, Motif, Athena and Photon GUI, you can define the special
-menu "PopUp".  This is the menu that is displayed when the right mouse button
-is pressed, if 'mousemodel' is set to popup or popup_setpos.
+In the Win32, KDE, GTK+, Motif, Athena and Photon GUI, you can define the
+special menu "PopUp".  This is the menu that is displayed when the right mouse
+button is pressed, if 'mousemodel' is set to popup or popup_setpos.
 
 
 5.3 Showing What Menus Are Mapped To			*showing-menus*
@@ -897,9 +897,13 @@ it behaves in a strange way.
 				appear on the menu-bar (see |hidden-menus|).
 				{only available for Win32 and GTK GUI}
 
+:popu[p]! {name}		Like above, but use the position of the mouse
+				pointer instead of the cursor.
+
 Example: >
 	:popup File
-will make the "File" menu (if there is one) appear at the text cursor. >
+will make the "File" menu (if there is one) appear at the text cursor (mouse
+pointer if ! was used). >
 
 	:amenu ]Toolbar.Make	:make<CR>
 	:popup ]Toolbar

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -150,6 +150,7 @@ commands in CTRL-X submode				*i_CTRL-X_index*
 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|	CTRL-X CTRL-K	complete identifiers from dictionary
 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|	CTRL-X CTRL-L	complete whole lines
 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-N|	CTRL-X CTRL-N	next completion
+|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|	CTRL-X CTRL-O	occult completion
 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-P|	CTRL-X CTRL-P	previous completion
 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|	CTRL-X CTRL-T	complete identifiers from thesaurus
 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-Y|	CTRL-X CTRL-Y	scroll down
@@ -684,6 +685,7 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 				   of the current screen line
 |g8|		g8		   print hex value of bytes used in UTF-8
 				   character under the cursor
+|g<|		g<		   display previous command output
 |g?|		g?		2  Rot13 encoding operator
 |g?g?|		g??		2  Rot13 encode current line
 |g?g?|		g?g?		2  Rot13 encode current line
@@ -1059,6 +1061,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:cNfile|	:cNf[ile]	go to last error in previous file
 |:cabbrev|	:ca[bbrev]	like ":abbreviate" but for Command-line mode
 |:cabclear|	:cabc[lear]	clear all abbreviations for Command-line mode
+|:caddfile|	:cad[dfile]	add error message to current quickfix list
 |:call|		:cal[l]		call a function
 |:catch|	:cat[ch]	part of a :try command
 |:cbuffer|	:cb[uffer]	parse error messages and jump to first error
@@ -1066,6 +1069,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:cclose|	:ccl[ose]	close quickfix window
 |:cd|		:cd		change directory
 |:center|	:ce[nter]	format lines at the center
+|:cexpr|	:cex[pr]	read errors from expr and jump to first
 |:cfile|	:cf[ile]	read file with error messages and jump to first
 |:cfirst|	:cfir[st]	go to the specified error, default first one
 |:cgetfile|	:cg[etfile]	read file with error messages
@@ -1137,6 +1141,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:elseif|	:elsei[f]	part of an :if command
 |:emenu|	:em[enu]	execute a menu by name
 |:endif|	:en[dif]	end previous :if
+|:endfor|	:endfo[r]	end previous :for
 |:endfunction|	:endf[unction]	end of a user function
 |:endtry|	:endt[ry]	end previous :try
 |:endwhile|	:endw[hile]	end previous :while
@@ -1158,11 +1163,12 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:folddoopen|	:foldd[oopen]	execute command on lines not in a closed fold
 |:folddoclosed|	:folddoc[losed]	execute command on lines in a closed fold
 |:foldopen|	:foldo[pen]	open folds
+|:for|		:for		for loop
 |:function|	:fu[nction]	define a user function
 |:global|	:g[lobal]	execute commands for matching lines
 |:goto|		:go[to]		go to byte in the buffer
 |:grep|		:gr[ep]		run 'grepprg' and jump to first match
-|:grepadd|	:grepa[dd]	like grep, but append to current list
+|:grepadd|	:grepa[dd]	like :grep, but append to current list
 |:gui|		:gu[i]		start the GUI
 |:gvim|		:gv[im]		start the GUI
 |:hardcopy|	:ha[rdcopy]	send text to the printer
@@ -1195,6 +1201,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:join|		:j[oin]		join lines
 |:jumps|	:ju[mps]	print the jump list
 |:k|		:k		set a mark
+|:keepalt|	:keepa[lt]	following command keeps the alternate file
 |:keepmarks|	:kee[pmarks]	following command keeps marks where they are
 |:keepjumps|	:keepj[jumps]	following command keeps jumplist and marks
 |:list|		:l[ist]		print lines
@@ -1227,11 +1234,13 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:messages|	:mes[sages]	view previously displayed messages
 |:mkexrc|	:mk[exrc]	write current mappings and settings to a file
 |:mksession|	:mks[ession]	write session info to a file
+|:mkspell|	:mksp[ell]	produce .spl spell file
 |:mkvimrc|	:mkv[imrc]	write current mappings and settings to a file
 |:mkview|	:mkvie[w]	write view of current window to a file
 |:mode|		:mod[e]		show or change the screen mode
 |:mzscheme|	:mz[scheme]	execute MzScheme command
 |:mzfile|	:mzf[ile]	execute MzScheme script file
+|:nbkey|	:nb[key]	pass a key to Netbeans
 |:next|		:n[ext]		go to next file in the argument list
 |:new|		:new		create a new empty window
 |:nmap|		:nm[ap]		like ":map" but for Normal mode
@@ -1262,6 +1271,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:pedit|	:ped[it]	edit file in the preview window
 |:perl|		:pe[rl]		execute Perl command
 |:print|	:p[rint]	print lines
+|:profdel|	:profd[el]	stop profiling a function or script
 |:profile|	:prof[ile]	profiling functions and scripts
 |:promptfind|	:pro[mtfind]	open GUI dialog for searching
 |:promptrepl| 	:promtr[epl]	open GUI dialog for search/replace
@@ -1311,6 +1321,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:substitute|	:s[ubstitute]	find and replace text
 |:sNext|	:sN[ext]	split window and go to previous file in
 				argument list
+|:sandbox|	:san[dbox]	execute a command in the sandbox
 |:sargument|	:sa[rgument]	split window and go to specific file in
 				argument list
 |:sall|		:sal[l]		open a window for each file in argument list
@@ -1354,7 +1365,12 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 				argument list
 |:sniff|	:sni[ff]	send request to sniff
 |:snomagic|	:sno[magic]	:substitute with 'nomagic'
+|:sort|		:sor[t]		sort lines
 |:source|	:so[urce]	read Vim or Ex commands from a file
+|:spelldump|	:spelld[ump]	split window and fill with all correct words
+|:spellgood|	:spe[llgood]	add good word for spelling
+|:spellrepall|	:spellr[epall]	replace all bad words like last |z?|
+|:spellwrong|	:spellw[rong]	add spelling mistake
 |:split|	:sp[lit]	split current window
 |:sprevious|	:spr[evious]	split window and go to previous file in the
 				argument list
@@ -1407,6 +1423,8 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:version|	:ve[rsion]	print version number and other info
 |:verbose|	:verb[ose]	execute command with 'verbose' set
 |:vertical|	:vert[ical]	make following command split vertically
+|:vimgrep|	:vim[grep]	search for pattern in files
+|:vimgrepadd|	:vimgrepa[dd]	like :vimgrep, but append to current list
 |:visual|	:vi[sual]	same as ":edit", but turns off "Ex" mode
 |:viusage|	:viu[sage]	overview of Normal mode commands
 |:view|		:vie[w]		edit a file read-only

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 08
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Aug 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ entering new data while keeping all the columns aligned.
 ==============================================================================
 7. Insert mode completion				*ins-completion*
 
-In Insert and Replace modes, there are several commands to complete part of a
+In Insert and Replace mode, there are several commands to complete part of a
 keyword or line that has been typed.  This is useful if you are using
 complicated keywords (e.g., function names with capitals and underscores).
 
@@ -565,7 +565,9 @@ Completion can be done for:
 7. file names						|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-F|
 8. definitions or macros				|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
 9. Vim command-line					|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-V|
-10. keywords in 'complete'				|i_CTRL-N|
+10. User defined completion				|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
+11. Occult completion					|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
+12. keywords in 'complete'				|i_CTRL-N|
 
 All these (except 2) are done in CTRL-X mode.  This is a sub-mode of Insert
 and Replace modes.  You enter CTRL-X mode by typing CTRL-X and one of the
@@ -612,12 +614,12 @@ Completing whole lines					*compl-whole-line*
 
 							*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L*
 CTRL-X CTRL-L		Search backwards for a line that starts with the
-			same characters as in the current line before the
-			cursor.  Indent is ignored.  The found line is
+			same characters as those in the current line before
+			the cursor.  Indent is ignored.  The matching line is
 			inserted in front of the cursor.
-			The 'complete' option is used to decide in which
-			buffers a match is searched for.  But only loaded
-			buffers are used.
+			The 'complete' option is used to decide which buffers
+			are searched for a match.  Only loaded buffers are
+			used.
 	CTRL-L	or
 	CTRL-P		Search backwards for next matching line.  This line
 			replaces the previous matching line.
@@ -839,7 +841,8 @@ CTRL-X CTRL-D		Search in the current and included files for the
 Completing Vim commands					*compl-vim*
 
 Completion is context-sensitive.  It works like on the Command-line.  It
-completes an Ex command as well as its arguments.
+completes an Ex command as well as its arguments.  This is useful when writing
+a Vim script.
 
 							*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-V*
 CTRL-X CTRL-V		Guess what kind of item is in front of the cursor and
@@ -858,7 +861,7 @@ CTRL-X CTRL-V		Guess what kind of item is in front of the cursor and
 			completion, for example: >
 				:imap <Tab> <C-X><C-V>
 
-User defined completing					*compl-function*
+User defined completion					*compl-function*
 
 Completion is done by a function that can be defined by the user with the
 'completefunc' option.  See the option for how the function is called and an
@@ -875,6 +878,21 @@ CTRL-X CTRL-U		Guess what kind of item is in front of the cursor and
 			previous one.
 
 
+Occult completion					*compl-occult*
+
+Completion is done by a supernatural being.
+
+							*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O*
+CTRL-X CTRL-O		Guess what kind of item is in front of the cursor and
+			find the first match for it.
+	CTRL-O	or
+	CTRL-N		Use the next match.  This match replaces the previous
+			one.
+
+	CTRL-P		Use the previous match.  This match replaces the
+			previous one.
+
+
 Completing keywords from different sources		*compl-generic*
 
 							*i_CTRL-N*
@@ -1004,6 +1022,7 @@ NOTE: ":append" and ":insert" don't work properly in between ":if" and
 			Note that when using this command in a function or
 			script, the insertion only starts after the function
 			or script is finished.
+			This command does not work from |:normal|.
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the +ex_extra
 			feature}

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jun 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ The user may create scripts for Vim that use external commands.  These might
 introduce Y2K problems, but those are not really part of Vim itself.
 
 ==============================================================================
-3. Credits						*credits* *author*
+3. Credits				*credits* *author* *Bram* *Moolenaar*
 
 Most of Vim was written by Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>.
 

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -932,26 +932,36 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=tag_listfiles	tags, file names are shown when CTRL-D is hit
 	-complete=var		user variables
 	-complete=custom,{func} custom completion, defined via {func}
+	-complete=customlist,{func} custom completion, defined via {func}
 
 Custom completion			    *:command-completion-custom*
 							*E467* *E468*
 It is possible to define customized completion schemes via the "custom,{func}"
-completion argument.  The {func} part should be a function with the following
-prototype >
+or the "customlist,{func}" completion argument.  The {func} part should be a
+function with the following prototype >
 
 	:function {func}(ArgLead, CmdLine, CursorPos)
 
-The function need not use all these arguments, but it should provide the
-completion candidates as the return value, one per line in a newline separated
-string.  The function arguments are:
+The function need not use all these arguments. The function should provide the
+completion candidates as the return value.
+
+For the "custom" argument, the function should return the completion
+candidates one per line in a newline separated string.
+
+For the "customlist" argument, the function should return the completion
+candidates as a Vim List. Non-string items in the list are ignored.
+
+The function arguments are:
 	ArgLead		the leading portion of the argument currently being
 			completed on
 	CmdLine		the entire command line
 	CursorPos	the cursor position in it
-The function may use these for determining context.  It is not necessary to
-filter candidates against the (implicit pattern in) ArgLead.  Vim will do
-filter the candidates with its regexp engine after function return, and this
-is probably more efficient in most cases.
+The function may use these for determining context.  For the "custom"
+argument, it is not necessary to filter candidates against the (implicit
+pattern in) ArgLead.  Vim will do filter the candidates with its regexp engine
+after function return, and this is probably more efficient in most cases. For
+the "customlist" argument, Vim will not filter the returned completion
+candidates and the user supplied function should filter the candidates.
 
 The following example lists user names to a Finger command >
     :com -complete=custom,ListUsers -nargs=1 Finger !finger <args>
@@ -959,6 +969,14 @@ The following example lists user names to a Finger command >
     :    return system("cut -d: -f1 /etc/passwd")
     :endfun
 
+The following example completes filenames from the directories specified in
+the 'path' option: >
+    :com -nargs=1 -bang -complete=customlist,EditFileComplete
+			\ EditFile edit<bang> <args>
+    :fun EditFileComplete(A,L,P)
+    :    return split(globpath(&path, a:ArgLead), "\n")
+    :endfun
+<
 Range handling						*E177* *E178*
 
 By default, user-defined commands do not accept a line number range.  However,
@@ -1032,6 +1050,7 @@ The valid escape sequences are
 If the first two characters of an escape sequence are "q-" (for example,
 <q-args>) then the value is quoted in such a way as to make it a valid value
 for use in an expression.  This uses the argument as one single value.
+When there is no argument <q-args> is an empty string.
 
 To allow commands to pass their arguments on to a user-defined function, there
 is a special form <f-args> ("function args").  This splits the command

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -286,6 +286,29 @@ Supported 'encoding' values are:			*encoding-values*
 1   koi8-u	Ukrainian
 1   macroman    MacRoman (Macintosh encoding)
 1   8bit-{name} any 8-bit encoding (Vim specific name)
+1   cp437	similar to iso-8859-1
+1   cp737	similar to iso-8859-7
+1   cp775	Baltic
+1   cp850	similar to iso-8859-4
+1   cp852	similar to iso-8859-1
+1   cp855	similar to iso-8859-2
+1   cp857	similar to iso-8859-5
+1   cp860	similar to iso-8859-9
+1   cp861	similar to iso-8859-1
+1   cp862	similar to iso-8859-1
+1   cp863	similar to iso-8859-8
+1   cp865	similar to iso-8859-1
+1   cp866	similar to iso-8859-5
+1   cp869	similar to iso-8859-7
+1   cp874	Thai
+1   cp1250	Czech, Polish, etc.
+1   cp1251	Cyrillic
+1   cp1253	Greek
+1   cp1254	Turkish
+1   cp1255	Hebrew
+1   cp1256	Arabic
+1   cp1257	Baltic
+1   cp1258	Vietnamese
 1   cp{number}	MS-Windows: any installed single-byte codepage
 2   cp932	Japanese (Windows only)
 2   euc-jp	Japanese (Unix only)

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Feb 13
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Aug 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -21,6 +21,14 @@ depends on the 'shortmess' option.
 
 The number of remembered messages is fixed at 20.
 
+								*g<*
+The "g<" command can be used to see the last page of previous command output.
+This is especially useful if you accidentally typed <Space> at the hit-return
+prompt.
+Note: when you stopped the output with "q" at the more prompt only up to that
+point will be displayed.
+The previous command output is cleared when another command produces output.
+
 If you are using translated messages, the first printed line tells who
 maintains the messages or the translations.  You can use this to contact the
 maintainer when you spot a mistake.
@@ -279,6 +287,19 @@ Example: >
 changes to: >
 	:w! /tmp/test
 <
+							*E768*  >
+  Swap file exists: {filename} (:silent! overrides)
+
+You are protected from overwriting a file that is being edited by Vim.  This
+happens when you use ":w! filename" and a swapfile is found.
+- If the swapfile was left over from an old crashed edit session you may want
+  to delete the swapfile.  Edit {filename} to find out information about the
+  swapfile.
+- If you want to write anyway prepend ":silent!" to the command.  For example: >
+  	:silent! w! /tmp/test
+< The special command is needed, since you already added the ! for overwriting
+  an existing file.
+
 							*E139*  >
   File is loaded in another buffer
 
@@ -714,9 +735,10 @@ a user-defined command.
 
 This is an (incomplete) overview of various messages that Vim gives:
 
-		*hit-enter* *press-enter* *hit-return* *press-return*  >
+			*hit-enter* *press-enter* *hit-return*
+			*press-return* *hit-enter-prompt*
 
-  Hit ENTER or type command to continue
+  Press ENTER or type command to continue
 
 This message is given when there is something on the screen for you to read,
 and the screen is about to be redrawn:
@@ -724,10 +746,13 @@ and the screen is about to be redrawn:
 - Something is displayed on the status line that is longer than the width of
   the window, or runs into the 'showcmd' or 'ruler' output.
 
--> Hit <Enter> or <Space> to redraw the screen and continue, without that key
-   being used otherwise.
--> Hit ":" or any other Normal mode command character to start that command.
--> Hit <C-Y> to copy (yank) a modeless selection to the clipboard register.
+-> Press <Enter> or <Space> to redraw the screen and continue, without that
+   key being used otherwise.
+-> Press ':' or any other Normal mode command character to start that command.
+-> Press 'k', 'u', 'b' or 'g' to scroll back in the messages.  This works the
+   same way as at the |more-prompt|.  Only works when 'compatible' is off and
+   'more' is on.
+-> Press <C-Y> to copy (yank) a modeless selection to the clipboard register.
 -> Use a menu.  The characters defined for Cmdline-mode are used.
 -> When 'mouse' contains the 'r' flag, clicking the left mouse button works
    like pressing <Space>.  This makes it impossible to select text though.
@@ -735,6 +760,9 @@ and the screen is about to be redrawn:
    pressing <Space>.
 {Vi: only ":" commands are interpreted}
 
+If you accidentally hit <Enter> or <Space> and you want to see the displayed
+text then use |g<|.  This only works when 'more' is set.
+
 To reduce the number of hit-enter prompts:
 - Set 'cmdheight' to 2 or higher.
 - Add flags to 'shortmess'.
@@ -746,8 +774,7 @@ group.
 
 						*more-prompt* *pager*  >
   -- More --
-  -- More -- (RET: line, SPACE: page, d: half page, q: quit)
-  -- More -- (RET/BS: line, SPACE/b: page, d/u: half page, q: quit)
+  -- More -- SPACE/d/j: screen/page/line down, b/u/k: up, q: quit
 
 This message is given when the screen is filled with messages.  It is only
 given when the 'more' option is on.  It is highlighted with the |hl-MoreMsg|
@@ -755,11 +782,16 @@ group.
 
 Type					effect ~
      <CR> or <NL> or j or <Down>	one more line
+     d					down a page (half a screen)
+     <Space> or <PageDown>		down a screen
+     G					down all the way, until the hit-enter
+     					prompt
+
      <BS> or k or <Up>			one line back (*)
-     <Space> or <PageDown>		next page
-     b or <PageUp>			previous page (*)
-     d					down half a page
-     u					up half a page (*)
+     u					up a page (half a screen) (*)
+     b or <PageUp>			back a screen (*)
+     g					back to the start (*)
+
      q, <Esc> or CTRL-C			stop the listing
      :					stop the listing and enter a
 					     command-line
@@ -771,8 +803,8 @@ Type					effect ~
 
 Any other key causes the meaning of the keys to be displayed.
 
-(*) backwards scrolling is only supported for these commands: >
-    :clist
+(*)  backwards scrolling is {not in Vi}.  Only scrolls back to where messages
+     started to scroll.
 (**) Clicking the left mouse button only works:
      - For the GUI: in the last line of the screen.
      - When 'r' is included in 'mouse' (but then selecting text won't work).

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 04
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ and end position.  Generally, motions that move between lines affect lines
 characterwise).  However, there are some exceptions.
 
 						*exclusive* *inclusive*
-A character motion is either inclusive or exclusive.  When inclusive, the start
-and end position of the motion are included in the operation.  When exclusive,
-the last character towards the end of the buffer is not included.  Linewise
-motions always include the start and end position.
+A character motion is either inclusive or exclusive.  When inclusive, the
+start and end position of the motion are included in the operation.  When
+exclusive, the last character towards the end of the buffer is not included.
+Linewise motions always include the start and end position.
 
-Which motions are linewise, inclusive or exclusive is mentioned below.  There
-are however, two general exceptions:
+Which motions are linewise, inclusive or exclusive is mentioned with the
+command.  There are however, two general exceptions:
 1. If the motion is exclusive and the end of the motion is in column 1, the
    end of the motion is moved to the end of the previous line and the motion
    becomes inclusive.  Example: "}" moves to the first line after a paragraph,
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ f{char}			To [count]'th occurrence of {char} to the right.  The
 
 							*F*
 F{char}			To the [count]'th occurrence of {char} to the left.
-			The cursor is placed on {char} |inclusive|.
+			The cursor is placed on {char} |exclusive|.
 			{char} can be entered like with the |f| command.
 
 							*t*
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ t{char}			Till before [count]'th occurrence of {char} to the
 							*T*
 T{char}			Till after [count]'th occurrence of {char} to the
 			left.  The cursor is placed on the character right of
-			{char} |inclusive|.
+			{char} |exclusive|.
 			{char} can be entered like with the |f| command.
 
 							*;*
@@ -595,6 +595,20 @@ i<			"inner <> block", select [count] <> blocks, from
 			'>', excluding the '<' and '>'.
 			When used in Visual mode it is made characterwise.
 
+						*v_at* *at*
+at			"a tag block", select [count] tag blocks, from the
+			[count]'th unmatched "<aaa>" backwards to the matching
+			"</aaa>", including the "<aaa>" and "</aaa>".
+			See |tag-blocks| about the details.
+			When used in Visual mode it is made characterwise.
+
+						*v_it* *it*
+it			"inner tag block", select [count] tag blocks, from the
+			[count]'th unmatched "<aaa>" backwards to the matching
+			"</aaa>", excluding the "<aaa>" and "</aaa>".
+			See |tag-blocks| about the details.
+			When used in Visual mode it is made characterwise.
+
 a}							*v_a}* *a}* *a{*
 a{							*v_aB* *v_a{* *aB*
 aB			"a Block", select [count] Blocks, from "[count] [{" to
@@ -679,6 +693,25 @@ where on the object the cursor is.  For example, compare "dw" and "daw": "dw"
 deletes from the cursor position to the start of the next word, "daw" deletes
 the word under the cursor and the space after or before it.
 
+
+Tag blocks						*tag-blocks*
+
+For the "it" and "at" text objects an attempt is done to select blocks between
+matching tags for HTML and XML.  But since these are not completely compatible
+there are a few restrictions.
+
+The normal method is to select a <tag> until the matching </tag>.  For "at"
+the tags are included, for "it" they are excluded.  But when "it" is repeated
+the tags will be included (otherwise nothing would change).
+
+"<aaa/>" items are skipped.  Case is ignored, also for XML where case does
+matter.
+
+In HTML it is possible to have a tag like <br> or <meta ...> without a
+matching end tag.  These are ignored.
+
+The text objects are tolerant about mistakes.  Stray end tags are ignored.
+
 ==============================================================================
 7. Marks					*mark-motions* *E20* *E78*
 

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 14
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Aug 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -657,12 +657,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with the
 			|+netbeans_intg| or |+sun_workshop| feature}
-	When on, Vim will change its value for the current working directory
-	whenever you open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or
-	open/close a window.  It will change to the directory containing the
-	file which was opened or selected.  This option is provided for
-	backward compatibility with the Vim released with Sun ONE Studio 4
-	Enterprise Edition.
+	When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you
+	open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.
+	It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened
+	or selected.
+	This option is provided for backward compatibility with the Vim
+	released with Sun ONE Studio 4 Enterprise Edition.
+	Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.  The directory
+	browser sets if off.
 
 				*'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
 'arabic' 'arab'		boolean (default off)
@@ -1013,7 +1015,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!
 	Example: >
     function! MyBalloonExpr()
-	return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum . 
+	return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum .
 		\', column ' . v:beval_col .
 		\ ' of file ' .  bufname(v:beval_bufnr) .
 		\ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"'
@@ -1026,6 +1028,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans
 	or Sun Workshop).
 
+	To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: >
+		if has("balloon_multiline")
+<
 				     *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
 'binary' 'bin'		boolean	(default off)
 			local to buffer
@@ -1061,7 +1066,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'bioskey' 'biosk'	boolean	(default on)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
-	When on the bios is called to obtain a keyboard character.  This works
+	When on the BIOS is called to obtain a keyboard character.  This works
 	better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console.  When using a
 	terminal over a serial port reset this option.
 	Also see |'conskey'|.
@@ -1443,7 +1448,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|fold-marker|.
 
 			*'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
-'compatible' 'cp'	boolean	(default on, off when a .vimrc file is found)
+'compatible' 'cp'	boolean	(default on, off when a .vimrc or .gvimrc file
+								is found)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
@@ -1458,12 +1464,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	options.  This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
 	just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
 	option.
-	When a ".vimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up, this option is
-	switched off, and all options that have not been modified will be set
-	to the Vim defaults.  Effectively, this means that when a ".vimrc"
-	file exists, Vim will use the Vim defaults, otherwise it will use the
-	Vi defaults.  (Note: This doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc
-	file).  Also see |compatible-default| and |posix-compliance|.
+	When a ".vimrc" or ".gvimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up,
+	this option is switched off, and all options that have not been
+	modified will be set to the Vim defaults.  Effectively, this means
+	that when a ".vimrc" or ".gvimrc" file exists, Vim will use the Vim
+	defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults.  (Note: This doesn't
+	happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file).  Also see
+	|compatible-default| and |posix-compliance|.
 	You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with
 	"-N".  See |-C| and |-N|.
 	Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options
@@ -1577,46 +1584,54 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'completefunc' 'cfu'	string	(default: empty)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
-	This option specifies a completion function to be used for CTRL-X
-	CTRL-X.  The function will be invoked with four arguments:
-	   a:line	the text of the current line
-	   a:base	the text with which matches should match
-	   a:col        column in a:line where the cursor is, first column is
-	   		zero
+			{not available when compiled without the +eval
+			or +insert_expand feature}
+	This option specifies a function to be used for CTRL-X CTRL-U
+	completion. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
+
+	The function will be invoked with three arguments:
 	   a:findstart  either 1 or 0
+	   a:col        column in the cursor line where the completion ends,
+			first column is zero
+	   a:base	the text with which matches should match
+
 	When the a:findstart argument is 1, the function must return the
 	column of where the completion starts.  It must be a number between
-	zero and "a:col".  This involves looking at the characters in a:line
-	before column a:col and include those characters that could be part of
-	the completed item.
-	When the a:findstart argument is 0 the function must return a string
-	with the matching words, separated by newlines.  When there are no
-	matches return an empty string.
+	zero and "a:col".  This involves looking at the characters in the
+	cursor line before column a:col and include those characters that
+	could be part of the completed item.  The text between this column and
+	a:col will be replaced with the matches.  Return -1 if no completion
+	can be done.
+
+	When the a:findstart argument is 0 the function must return a List
+	with the matching words.  These matches should include the "a:base"
+	text.  When there are no matches return an empty List.
+
+	The function must not move the cursor!
+
 	An example that completes the names of the months: >
-		fun! CompleteMonths(line, base, col, findstart)
+		fun! CompleteMonths(findstart, col, base)
 		  if a:findstart
-		    " locate start column of word
+		    " locate the start of the word
+		    let line = getline('.')
 		    let start = a:col
-		    while start > 0 && a:line[start - 1] =~ '\a'
-		      let start = start - 1
+		    while start > 0 && line[start - 1] =~ '\a'
+		      let start -= 1
 		    endwhile
 		    return start
 		  else
 		    " find months matching with "a:base"
-		    let res = "Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec"
-		    if a:base != ''
-		      let res = substitute(res, '\c\<\(\(' . a:base . '.\{-}\>\)\|.\{-}\>\)', '\2', 'g')
-		    endif
-		    let res = substitute(res, ' \+', "\n", 'g')
+		    let res = []
+		    for m in split("Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec")
+		      if m =~ '^' . a:base
+			call add(res, m)
+		      endif
+		    endfor
 		    return res
 		  endif
 		endfun
 		set completefunc=CompleteMonths
-<	Note that a substitute() function is used to reduce the list of
-	possible values and remove the ones that don't match the base.  The
-	part before the "\|" matches the base, the part after it is used
-	when there is no match.  The "\2" in the replacement is empty if the
-	part before the "\|" does not match.
+<
 
 				*'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
 'confirm' 'cf'		boolean (default off)
@@ -2161,10 +2176,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
 	  put the swap file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading
 	  "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
-	- For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators, the
-	  swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
-	  with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs.  This will
-	  ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
+	- For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//"
+	  or "\\", the swap file name will be built from the complete path to
+	  the file with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs.
+	  This will ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
 	- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
 	  of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
 	  name, precede it with a backslash.
@@ -2276,8 +2291,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has
 	effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.
 
-	 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
-	 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.
+	When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
+	not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.
 
 			*'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
 'endofline' 'eol'	boolean	(default on)
@@ -3316,7 +3331,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				     t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
 				     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
 				     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
-				     >:SignColumn")
+				     >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,
+				     R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
@@ -3348,8 +3364,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|hl-WildMenu|	 W  wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'
 	|hl-Folded|	 f  line used for closed folds
 	|hl-FoldColumn|	 F  'foldcolumn'
+	|hl-DiffAdd|	 A  added line in diff mode
+	|hl-DiffChange|	 C  changed line in diff mode
+	|hl-DiffDelete|	 D  deleted line in diff mode
+	|hl-DiffText|	 T  inserted text in diff mode
 	|hl-SignColumn|	 >  column used for |signs|
 	|hl-SpellBad|	 B  misspelled word |spell|
+	|hl-SpellCap|	 P  word that should start with capital|spell|
 	|hl-SpellRare|	 R  rare word |spell|
 	|hl-SpellLocal|	 L  word from other region |spell|
 
@@ -4294,7 +4315,6 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		h	all previous modes when editing a help file
 		a	all previous modes
 		r	for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
-		A	auto-select in Visual mode
 	Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: >
 		:set mouse=a
 <	When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for
@@ -5634,20 +5654,131 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When on spell checking will be done.  See |spell|.
 	The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.
 
-						*'spelllang'* *'spl'*
-'spelllang' 'spl'	string	(default empty)
+						*'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'*
+'spellcapcheck' 'spc'	string	(default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+")
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
 			feature}
-	A comma separated list of languages.  when the 'spell' option is on
-	spellchecking will be done for these languages.  Example: >
-		set spelllang=en_us,nl
-<	This means both US English and Dutch words are recognized.  Words that
-	are not recognized will be highlighted.
+	Pattern to locate the end of a sentence.  The following word will be
+	checked to start with a capital letter.  If not then it is highlighted
+	with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap|.
+	When this check is not wanted make this option empty.
+	Only used when 'spell' is set.
+	Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about
+	including spaces and backslashes.
+
+						*'spellfile'* *'spf'*
+'spellfile' 'spf'	string	(default empty)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
+			feature}
+	Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw|
+	commands.  It must end in ".{encoding}.add".  You need to include the
+	path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory.
+								*E765*
+	It may also be a comma separated list of names.  A count before the
+	|zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each.  This allows using
+	a personal word list file and a project word list file.
+	When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for
+	you: Using the first "spell" directory in 'runtimepath' that is
+	writable and the first language name that appears in 'spelllang',
+	ignoring the region.
+	The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not
+	have to appear in 'spelllang'.
+	Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region
+	name if you want to.  However, it will then only be used when
+	'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files
+	without region name will be found.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'spelllang'* *'spl'*
+'spelllang' 'spl'	string	(default "en")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
+			feature}
+	A comma separated list of word list names.  When the 'spell' option is
+	on spellchecking will be done for these languages.  Example: >
+		set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical
+<	This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized.  Words
+	that are not recognized will be highlighted.
+	The word list name must not include a comma or dot.  Using a dash is
+	recommended to separate the two letter language name from a
+	specification.  Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words.
+	A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is
+	the two-letter, lower case region name.  You can use more than one
+	region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian
+	English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great
+	Britain.
+	As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is.  The
+	first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name
+	(_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter).
+	This is mainly for testing purposes.  You must make sure the correct
+	encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it.
 	When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded.  Thus it's a good
-	idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding'.
-	More info at |spell|.
+	idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the
+	files twice.
+	How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|.
+
+						*'spellsuggest'* *'sps'*
+'spellsuggest' 'sps'	string	(default "best")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
+			feature}
+	Methods used for spelling suggestions.  Both for the |z?| command and
+	the |spellsuggest()| function.  This is a comma-separated list of
+	items:
+
+	best		Internal method that works best for English.  Finds
+			changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like
+			scoring to improve the ordering.
+
+	double		Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the
+			results.  The first method is "fast", the other method
+			computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad
+			word.  That only works when the language specifies
+			sound folding.  Can be slow and doesn't always give
+			better results.
+
+	fast		Internal method that only checks for simple changes:
+			character inserts/deletes/swaps.  Works well for
+			simple typing mistakes.
+
+	file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns,
+			separated by a slash.  The first column contains the
+			bad word, the second column the suggested good word.
+			Example:
+				theribal/terrible ~
+			Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the
+			top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.
+			Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for
+			comments.
+			The file is used for all languages.
+
+	expr:{expr}	Evaluate expression {expr}.  Use a function to avoid
+			trouble with spaces.  |v:val| holds the badly spelled
+			word.  The expression must evaluate to a List of
+			Lists, each with a suggestion and a score.
+			Example:
+				[['the', 33], ['that', 44]]
+			Set 'verbose' and use |z?| to see the scores that the
+			internal methods use.  A lower score is better.
+			This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily
+			set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part.
+			Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the
+			'verbose' option to a non-zero value.
+
+	Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used.  The others may
+	appear several times in any order.  Example: >
+		:set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest()
+<
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 
 			*'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
 'splitbelow' 'sb'	boolean	(default off)
@@ -5900,6 +6031,19 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			a buffer.  Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
 			Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
 
+						*'synmaxcol'* *'smc'*
+'synmaxcol' 'smc'	number	(default 3000)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
+			feature}
+	Maximum column in which to search for syntax items.  In long lines the
+	text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not
+	be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared.
+	This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one
+	long line.
+	Set to zero to remove the limit.
+
 						*'syntax'* *'syn'*
 'syntax' 'syn'		string	(default empty)
 			local to buffer
@@ -5911,7 +6055,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
 	b:current_syntax variable does).
 	This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
-	not automatically recognized.  Example, for in an IDL file: >
+	not automatically recognized.  Example, in an IDL file: >
 		/* vim: set syntax=idl : */
 <	To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
 		:set syntax=OFF
@@ -6536,6 +6680,21 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option can also be set with the "-V" argument.  See |-V|.
 	This option is also set by the |:verbose| command.
 
+	When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not
+	displayed.
+
+						*'verbosefile'* *'vfile'*
+'verbosefile' 'vfile'	string	(default empty)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.
+	When the file exists messages are appended.
+	Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made
+	empty.
+	Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.
+	The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not
+	displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.
+
 						*'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
 'viewdir' 'vdir'	string	(default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:
 							 "$VIM/vimfiles/view",

runtime/doc/os_beos.txt

@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Stuff that does not work yet:
   when it flashes)
 
 
-The $VIM directory					*beos-vimdir*
+6. The $VIM directory					*beos-vimdir*
 
 $VIM is the symbolic name for the place where Vims support files are stored.
 The default value for $VIM is set at compile time and can be determined with >

runtime/doc/os_vms.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 01
+*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
@@ -47,16 +47,19 @@ You can download precompiled executables from:
 
 To use the precompiled binary version, you need one of these archives:
 
-  vim-XX-exe-alpha-gui.zip      Alpha GUI/Motif executables
-  vim-XX-exe-alpha-gtk.zip      Alpha GUI/GTK executables
-  vim-XX-exe-alpha-term.zip     Alpha console executables
+  vim-XX-exe-ia64-gui.zip       IA64 GUI/Motif executables
+  vim-XX-exe-ia64-gtk.zip       IA64 GUI/GTK executables
+  vim-XX-exe-ia64-term.zip      IA64 console executables
+  vim-XX-exe-axp-gui.zip        Alpha GUI/Motif executables
+  vim-XX-exe-axp-gtk.zip        Alpha GUI/GTK executables
+  vim-XX-exe-axp-term.zip       Alpha console executables
   vim-XX-exe-vax-gui.zip	VAX GUI executables
   vim-XX-exe-vax-term.zip       VAX console executables
 
 and of course
   vim-XX-runtime.zip		runtime files
 
-The binary archives contain: vim.exe, ctags.exe, xxd.exe, mms_vim.exe files.
+The binary archives contain: vim.exe, ctags.exe, xxd.exe files.
 
 ==============================================================================
 
@@ -68,8 +71,8 @@ See the file [.SRC]INSTALLVMS.TXT.
 
 4. Problems						*vms-problems*
 
-The code has been tested under Open VMS 6.2 - 7.3 on Alpha and VAX platforms
-with the DEC C compiler.  It should work without bigger problems.
+The code has been tested under Open VMS 6.2 - 8.2 on Alpha, VAX and IA64
+platforms with the DEC C compiler.  It should work without bigger problems.
 If your system does not have some include libraries you can tune up in
 OS_VMS_CONF.H file.
 
@@ -78,6 +81,8 @@ to download OpenVMS distributions of Perl and Python.  Build and deploy the
 libraries and change adequate lines in MAKE_VMS.MMS file.  There should not be
 a problem from Vim side.
 
+Also GTK, XPM library paths should be configured in MAKE_VMS.MMS
+
 Note: Under VAX it should work with the DEC C compiler without problems.  The
 VAX C compiler is not fully ANSI C compatible in pre-processor directives
 semantics, therefore you have to use a converter program what will do the lion
@@ -250,7 +255,7 @@ you will get errors that some shareable libraries are missing.
 
 Third: If you choose to run Vim with extra features such as GUI/GTK then you
 need a GTK installation too or at least a GTK runtime environment (LIBGTK
-etc.).
+can be downloaded from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/).
 
 1) If you are working on the VMS X/Motif console:
    Start Vim with the command: >
@@ -648,6 +653,17 @@ start it with: >
 
 9. VMS related changes					*vms-changes*
 
+Version 7.0
+- GTKLIB and Vim build on IA64
+- colors in terminal mode
+- syntax highlighting in terminal mode
+- write problem fixed (extra CR)
+- ESC and ESC sequence recognition in terminal mode
+- make file changed to support new MMS version
+- env variable expansion in path corrected
+- printing problems corrected
+- help text added for case insensitive arguments
+
 Version 6.3 (2004 May 10)
 - Improved vms_read function
 - CTAGS v5.5.4 included

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 May 22
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -835,8 +835,8 @@ $	At end of pattern or in front of "\|" or "\)" ("|" or ")" after "\v"):
 	are halfway a Tab or other character that occupies more than one
 	screen character.  {not in Vi}
 	WARNING: When inserting or deleting text Vim does not automatically
-	update the matches.  This means Syntax highlighting quickly becomes
-	wrong.
+	update highlighted matches.  This means Syntax highlighting quickly
+	becomes wrong.
 	Example, to highlight the all characters after virtual column 72: >
 		/\%>72v.*
 <	When 'hlsearch' is set and you move the cursor around and make changes

runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 6.3.  Last change: Oct 08, 2004
+*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 6.3.  Last change: Jul 09, 2005
 
 
 		VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
@@ -10,17 +10,48 @@
 ==============================================================================
 0. Contents						*netrw-contents*
 
-1.  Netrw Reference.....................................|netrw-ref|
-2.  Network-Oriented File Transfer......................|netrw-xfer|
-3.  Activation..........................................|netrw-activate|
-4.  Transparent File Transfer...........................|netrw-transparent|
-5.  Ex Commands.........................................|netrw-ex|
-6.  Variables and Options...............................|netrw-var|
-7.  Directory Browser...................................|netrw-browse|
-8.  Problems and Fixes..................................|netrw-problems|
-9.  Debugging...........................................|netrw-debug|
-10. History.............................................|netrw-history|
-11. Credits.............................................|netrw-credits|
+1.  Netrw Reference......................................|netrw-ref|
+2.  Network-Oriented File Transfer.......................|netrw-xfer|
+      NETRC..............................................|netrw-netrc|
+      PASSWORD...........................................|netrw-passwd|
+3.  Activation...........................................|netrw-activate|
+4.  Transparent File Transfer............................|netrw-transparent|
+5.  Ex Commands..........................................|netrw-ex|
+6.  Variables and Options................................|netrw-var|
+7.  Directory Browser....................................|netrw-browse| {{{1
+      Maps...............................................|netrw-maps|
+      Exploring..........................................|netrw-explore-cmds|
+      Quick Reference Commands Table.....................|netrw-browse-cmds|
+      Netrw Browser Variables............................|netrw-browse-var|
+      Introduction To Directory Browsing.................|netrw-browse-intro|
+      Directory Exploring Commands.......................|netrw-explore|
+      Refreshing The Listing.............................|netrw-ctrl-l|
+      Going Up...........................................|netrw--|
+      Browsing...........................................|netrw-cr|
+      Long Vs Short Listing..............................|netrw-i|
+      Making A New Directory.............................|netrw-d|
+      Deleting Files Or Directories......................|netrw-delete|
+      Renaming Files Or Directories......................|netrw-move|
+      Hiding Files Or Directories........................|g:netrw-a|
+      Edit File Or Directory Hiding List.................|netrw-h|
+      Browsing With A Horizontally Split Window..........|netrw-o|
+      Preview Window.....................................|netrw-p|
+      Selecting Sorting Style............................|netrw-s|
+      Editing The Sorting Sequence.......................|netrw-S|
+      Reversing Sorting Order............................|netrw-r|
+      Changing To A Predecessor Directory................|netrw-u|
+      Changing To A Successor Directory..................|netrw-U|
+      Browsing With A Vertically Split Window............|netrw-v|
+      Customizing Browsing With A User Function..........|netrw-x|
+      Making The Browsing Directory The Current Directory|netrw-c|
+      Bookmarking A Directory............................|netrw-b|
+      Changing To A Bookmarked Directory.................|netrw-B|
+      Listing Bookmarks And History......................|netrw-q|
+      Improving Directory Browsing.......................|netrw-list-hack| }}}1
+8.  Problems and Fixes...................................|netrw-problems|
+9.  Debugging............................................|netrw-debug|
+10. History..............................................|netrw-history|
+11. Credits..............................................|netrw-credits|
 
 The functionality mentioned here is done via using |standard-plugin|
 techniques.  This plugin is only available if
@@ -177,16 +208,16 @@ by setting a variable (ex. scp uses the variable g:netrw_scp_cmd,
 which is defaulted to "scp -q").
 
 Ftp, an old protocol, seems to be blessed by numerous implementations.
-Unfortunately, some implementations are noisy (i.e., add junk to the end
+Unfortunately, some implementations are noisy (ie., add junk to the end
 of the file).  Thus, concerned users may decide to write a NetReadFixup()
 function that will clean up after reading with their ftp.  Some Unix systems
-(i.e., FreeBSD) provide a utility called "fetch" which uses the ftp protocol
+(ie., FreeBSD) provide a utility called "fetch" which uses the ftp protocol
 but is not noisy and more convenient, actually, for <netrw.vim> to use.
 Consequently, if "fetch" is executable, it will be used to do reads for
 ftp://... (and http://...) .  See |netrw-var| for more about this.
 
 For rcp, scp, sftp, and http, one may use network-oriented file transfers
-transparently; i.e.
+transparently; ie.
 >
 	vim rcp://[user@]machine/path
 	vim scp://[user@]machine/path
@@ -198,7 +229,7 @@ that file.  Your ftp must be able to use the <.netrc> file on its own, however.
 	vim ftp://[user@]machine[[:#]portnumber]/path
 <
 However, ftp will often need to query the user for the userid and password.
-The latter will be done "silently"; i.e. asterisks will show up instead of
+The latter will be done "silently"; ie. asterisks will show up instead of
 the actually-typed-in password.  Netrw will retain the userid and password
 for subsequent read/writes from the most recent transfer so subsequent
 transfers (read/write) to or from that machine will take place without
@@ -482,7 +513,7 @@ To handle the SSL certificate dialog for untrusted servers, one may pull
 down the certificate and place it into /usr/ssl/cert.pem.  This operation
 renders the server treatment as "trusted".
 
-							 	*netrw-fixup*
+					 	*netrw-fixup* *netreadfixup*
 If your ftp for whatever reason generates unwanted lines (such as AUTH
 messages) you may write a NetReadFixup(tmpfile) function:
 >
@@ -521,30 +552,38 @@ from <netrw.vim> itself:
 
 ==============================================================================
 7. Directory Browser	*netrw-browse* *netrw-dir* *netrw-list* *netrw-help*
-     ?..........Help....................................|netrw-help|
-     <cr>.......Browsing................................|netrw-cr|
-     <del>......Deleting Files or Directories...........|netrw-delete|
-     -..........Going Up................................|netrw--|
-     a..........Hiding Files or Directories.............|netrw-a|
-     b..........Bookmarking a Directory.................|netrw-b|
-     B..........Changing to a Bookmarked Directory......|netrw-B|
-     c..........Make Browsing Directory The Current Dir.|netrw-c|
-     d..........Make A New Directory....................|netrw-d|
-     D..........Deleting Files or Directories...........|netrw-D|
-     <c-h>......Edit File/Directory Hiding List.........|netrw-h|
-     i..........Long Listing............................|netrw-i|
-     <c-l>......Refreshing the Listing..................|netrw-ctrl-l|
-     o..........Browsing with a Horizontal Split........|netrw-o|
-     p..........Preview Window..........................|netrw-p|
-     q..........Listing Bookmarks and History...........|netrw-q|
-     r..........Reversing Sorting Order.................|netrw-r|
-     R..........Renaming Files or Directories...........|netrw-R|
-     s..........Selecting Sorting Style.................|netrw-s|
-     S..........Editing the Sorting Sequence............|netrw-S|
-     u..........Changing to a Predecessor Directory.....|netrw-u|
-     U..........Changing to a Successor Directory.......|netrw-U|
-     v..........Browsing with a Vertical Split..........|netrw-v|
-     x..........Customizing Browsing....................|netrw-x|
+
+MAPS   								*netrw-maps*
+     ?................Help.......................................|netrw-help|
+     <cr>.............Browsing...................................|netrw-cr|
+     <del>............Deleting Files or Directories..............|netrw-delete|
+     -................Going Up...................................|netrw--|
+     a................Hiding Files or Directories................|netrw-a|
+     b................Bookmarking a Directory....................|netrw-b|
+     B................Changing to a Bookmarked Directory.........|netrw-B|
+     c................Make Browsing Directory The Current Dir....|netrw-c|
+     d................Make A New Directory.......................|netrw-d|
+     D................Deleting Files or Directories..............|netrw-D|
+     <c-h>............Edit File/Directory Hiding List............|netrw-h|
+     i................Long Listing...............................|netrw-i|
+     <c-l>............Refreshing the Listing.....................|netrw-ctrl-l|
+     o................Browsing with a Horizontal Split...........|netrw-o|
+     p................Preview Window.............................|netrw-p|
+     q................Listing Bookmarks and History..............|netrw-q|
+     r................Reversing Sorting Order....................|netrw-r|
+     R................Renaming Files or Directories..............|netrw-R|
+     s................Selecting Sorting Style....................|netrw-s|
+     S................Editing the Sorting Sequence...............|netrw-S|
+     u................Changing to a Predecessor Directory........|netrw-u|
+     U................Changing to a Successor Directory..........|netrw-U|
+     v................Browsing with a Vertical Split.............|netrw-v|
+     x................Customizing Browsing.......................|netrw-x|
+
+    COMMANDS						*netrw-explore-cmds*
+     :Explore[!]  [dir].Explore directory of current file........|netrw-explore|
+     :Sexplore[!] [dir].Split & Explore directory of current file|netrw-explore|
+     :Hexplore[!] [dir].Horizontal Split & Explore...............|netrw-explore|
+     :Vexplore[!] [dir].Vertical Split & Explore.................|netrw-explore|
 
 QUICK REFERENCE COMMANDS TABLE     			*netrw-browse-cmds*
 >
@@ -581,51 +620,103 @@ NETRW BROWSER VARIABLES					*netrw-browse-var*
 <	g:netrw_alto			change from above splitting to
 					below splitting by setting this
 					variable (see |netrw-o|)
+					 default: =0
+
 	g:netrw_altv			change from left splitting to
 					right splitting by setting this
 					variable (see |netrw-v|)
+					 default: =0
+
 	g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject	ftp can produce a number of errors
 					and warnings that can show up as
 					"directories" and "files" in the
 					listing.  This pattern is used to
-					remove such embedded messages.
+					remove such embedded messages.  By
+					default its value is:
+					 '^total\s\+\d\+$\|
+					 ^Trying\s\+\d\+.*$\|
+					 ^KERBEROS_V\d rejected\|
+					 ^Security extensions not\|
+					 No such file\|
+					 : connect to address [0-9a-fA-F:]*
+					 : No route to host$'
+
+	g:netrw_ssh_browse_reject	ssh can sometimes produce unwanted
+					lines/messages/banners/and whatnot
+					that one doesn't want masquerading
+					as "directories" and "files".  Use
+					this pattern to remove such embedded
+					messages.  By default its value is:
+ 					 '^total\s\+\d\+$'
+
 	g:netrw_keepdir			=1 (default) keep current directory
 					immune from the browsing directory.
 					=0 keep the current directory the
 					same as the browsing directory.
 					The browsing directory is contained in
 					b:netrw_curdir
+
 	g:netrw_list_cmd		command for listing remote directories
+					 default: (if ssh is executable)
+					          "ssh HOSTNAME ls -FLa"
+
 	g:netrw_longlist		if =1, then long listing will be default
+
 	g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd		options for passing along to ftp for
 					directory listing.  Defaults:
 					 unix or g:netrw_cygwin set: : "ls -lF"
 					 otherwise                     "dir"
+
 	g:netrw_list_hide		comma separated list of patterns for
 					hiding files
+					 default: ""
+
 	g:netrw_local_mkdir		command for making a local directory
+					 default: "ssh HOSTNAME mkdir"
+
 	g:netrw_local_rmdir		remove directory command (rmdir)
-	g:netrw_local_rename		rename file/directory command
-					unix-default: rm    win32-default: ren
+					 default: "rmdir"
+
 	g:netrw_maxfilenamelen		=32 by default, selected so as to make
 					long listings fit on 80 column displays.
 					If your screen is wider, and you have
 					file/directory names longer than 32 bytes,
 					you may set this option to keep listings
 					columnar.
+
 	g:netrw_mkdir_cmd		command for making a remote directory
+					 default: "ssh HOSTNAME mkdir"
+
 	g:netrw_rm_cmd			command for removing files
+					 default: "ssh HOSTNAME rm"
+
 	g:netrw_rmdir_cmd		command for removing directories
+					 default: "ssh HOSTNAME rmdir"
+
 	g:netrw_rmf_cmd			command for removing softlinks
+					 default: "ssh HOSTNAME rm -f"
+
 	g:netrw_hide			if true, the hiding list is used
+					 default: =0
+
 	g:netrw_sort_by			sort by "name", "time", or "size"
+					 default: "name"
+
 	g:netrw_sort_direction		sorting direction: "normal" or "reverse"
+					 default: "normal"
+
 	g:netrw_sort_sequence		when sorting by name, first sort by the
 					comma-separated pattern sequence
-	g:netrw_timefmt			specify format string to strftime() (%c)
-	g:netrw_winsize			specify initial size of new o/v windows
+					 default: '[\/]$,*,\.bak$,\.o$,\.h$,
+					           \.info$,\.swp$,\.obj$'
 
-INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTORY BROWSING			*file-explorer*
+	g:netrw_timefmt			specify format string to strftime() (%c)
+					 default: "%c"
+
+	g:netrw_winsize			specify initial size of new o/v windows
+					 default: ""
+
+INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTORY BROWSING			*netrw-browse-intro*
 
 Netrw supports the browsing of directories on the local system and on remote
 hosts, including generating listing directories, entering directories, editing
@@ -647,6 +738,31 @@ trailing slash and it will be interpreted as a request to list a directory:
 If you'd like to avoid entering the password in for directory listings, scp,
 ssh interaction, etc, see |netrw-list-hack|.
 
+
+DIRECTORY EXPLORING COMMANDS						*netrw-explore*
+
+     :Explore[!]   [dir].Explore directory of current file
+     :Sexplore[!]  [dir].Split & Explore directory of current file
+     :Hexplore[!]  [dir].Horizontal Split & Explore
+     :Vexplore[!]  [dir].Vertical Split & Explore
+
+The Explore command will open the local-directory browser on the current
+file's directory (or on directory [dir] if specified).  The window
+will be split only if the file has been modified, otherwise the
+browsing window will take over that window.  Normally the splitting is
+taken horizontally; the optional ! will use vertical splitting.
+
+Sexplore will always split the window before invoking the local-directory
+browser.  As with Explore, the splitting is normally done horizontally,
+but with the optional ! the splitting will be done vertically.
+
+Hexplore does an Explore with |belowright| horizontal splitting; the
+optional ! does the Explore with |aboveleft| horizontal splitting.
+
+Vexplore does an Explore with |leftabove| vertical splitting; the optiona
+! does an Explore with |topleft| vertical splitting.
+
+
 REFRESHING THE LISTING					*netrw-ctrl-l*
 
 To refresh either a local or remote directory listing, press ctrl-l (<c-l>) or
@@ -677,6 +793,7 @@ Hitting the <cr> (the return key) will select the file or directory.
 Directories will themselves be listed, and files will be opened using the
 protocol given in the original read request.
 
+
 LONG VS SHORT LISTING						*netrw-i*
 
 The short listing format gives just the files' and directories' names.
@@ -694,6 +811,7 @@ new directory's name.  A bare <CR> at that point will abort the making of the
 directory.  Attempts to make a local directory that already exists (as either
 a file or a directory) will be detected, reported on, and ignored.
 
+
 DELETING FILES OR DIRECTORIES			*netrw-delete* *netrw-D*
 
 Deleting/removing files and directories involves moving the cursor to the
@@ -740,15 +858,22 @@ One may rename a block of files and directories by selecting them with
 the V (|linewise-visual|).
 
 
-HIDING FILES OR DIRECTORIES		*netrw-a* *g:netrw_list_hide*
+HIDING FILES OR DIRECTORIES		*g:netrw-a* *g:netrw_list_hide*
 
 Netrw's browsing facility allows one to use the hiding list in one of
 three ways: ignore it, hide files which match, and show only those files
-which match.  The g:netrw_list_hide variable holds a comma delimited list
-of patterns (ex. \.obj) which specify the hiding list. (also see |netrw-h|)
+which match.  The "a" map allows the user to cycle about these three ways.
+
+The g:netrw_list_hide variable holds a comma delimited list of patterns
+(ex. \.obj) which specify the hiding list. (also see |netrw-h|)  To
+set the hiding list, use the <c-h> map.  As an example, to hide files
+which begin with a ".", one may use the <c-h> map to set the hiding
+list to '^\..*' (or one may put  let g:netrw_list_hide= '^\..*' in
+one's <.vimrc>).  One may then use the "a" key to show all files,
+hide matching files, or to show only the matching files.
 
 
-EDIT FILE OR DIRECTORY HIDING LIST				*netrw-h*
+EDIT FILE OR DIRECTORY HIDING LIST		*netrw-h* *netrw-edithide*
 
 The "<ctrl-h>" map brings up a requestor allowing the user to change the
 file/directory hiding list.  The hiding list consists of one or more patterns
@@ -756,7 +881,7 @@ delimited by commas.  Files and/or directories satisfying these patterns will
 either be hidden (ie. not shown) or be the only ones displayed (see |netrw-a|).
 
 
-BROWSING WITH A HORIZONTALLY SPLIT WINDOW			*netrw-o*
+BROWSING WITH A HORIZONTALLY SPLIT WINDOW		*netrw-o* *netrw-horiz*
 
 Normally one enters a file or directory using the <cr>.  However, the "o" map
 allows one to open a new window to hold the new directory listing or file.  A
@@ -770,20 +895,21 @@ with the new window and cursor at the bottom, have
 
 in your <.vimrc>.
 
-PREVIEW WINDOW
+
+PREVIEW WINDOW					*netrw-p* *netrw-preview*
 
 One may use a preview window (currently only for local browsing) by using
 the "p" key when the cursor is atop the desired filename to be previewed.
 
 
-SELECTING SORTING STYLE						*netrw-s*
+SELECTING SORTING STYLE				*netrw-s* *netrw-sort*
 
 One may select the sorting style by name, time, or (file) size.  The
 "s" map allows one to circulate among the three choices; the directory
 listing will automatically be refreshed to reflect the selected style.
 
 
-EDITING THE SORTING SEQUENCE					*netrw-S*
+EDITING THE SORTING SEQUENCE		*netrw-S* *netrw-sortsequence*
 
 When "Sorted by" is name, one may specify priority via the sorting
 sequence (g:netrw_sort_sequence).  The sorting sequence typically
@@ -798,13 +924,13 @@ the g:netrw_sort_sequence variable (either manually or in your <.vimrc>)
 or by using the "S" map.
 
 
-REVERSING SORTING ORDER						*netrw-r*
+REVERSING SORTING ORDER			*netrw-r* *netrw-reverse*
 
 One may toggle between normal and reverse sorting order by pressing the
 "r" key.
 
 
-CHANGING TO A PREDECESSOR DIRECTORY				*netrw-u*
+CHANGING TO A PREDECESSOR DIRECTORY		*netrw-u* *netrw-updir*
 
 Every time you change to a new directory (new for the current session),
 netrw will save the directory in a recently-visited directory history
@@ -813,7 +939,7 @@ list (unless g:netrw_dirhistmax is zero; by default, its ten).  With the
 the opposite, see |netrw-U|.
 
 
-CHANGING TO A SUCCESSOR DIRECTORY				*netrw-U*
+CHANGING TO A SUCCESSOR DIRECTORY		*netrw-U* *netrw-downdir*
 
 With the "U" map, one can change to a later directory (successor).
 This map is the opposite of the "u" map. (see |netrw-u|)  Use the
@@ -835,7 +961,7 @@ with the new window and cursor at the right, have
 in your <.vimrc>.
 
 
-CUSTOMIZING BROWSING WITH A USER FUNCTION			*netrw-x*
+CUSTOMIZING BROWSING WITH A USER FUNCTION		*netrw-x* *netrw-handler*
 
 One may "enter" a file with a special handler, thereby firing up a browser or
 other application, for example, on a file by hitting the "x" key.  Presumably
@@ -886,13 +1012,13 @@ Any count may be used to reference any of the bookmarks.  See |netrw-b|
 for how to bookmark a directory and |netrw-q| for how to list them.
 
 
-LISTING BOOKMARKS AND HISTORY					*netrw-q*
+LISTING BOOKMARKS AND HISTORY			*netrw-q* *netrw-listbookmark*
 
 Pressing "q" will list the bookmarked directories and directory traversal
 history (query). (see |netrw-b|, |netrw-B|, |netrw-u|, and |netrw-U|)
 
 
-IMPROVING DIRECTORY BROWSING				*netrw-list-hack*
+IMPROVING DIRECTORY BROWSING				*netrw-listhack*
 
 Especially with the remote directory browser, constantly entering the password
 is tedious.
@@ -1017,6 +1143,23 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).
 ==============================================================================
 10. History						*netrw-history*
 
+	v56: * LocalBrowse now saves autochdir setting, unsets it, and
+	       restores it before returning.
+	     * using vim's rename() instead of system + local_rename variable
+	v55: * -bar used with :Explore :Sexplore etc to allow multiple
+	       commands to be separated by |s
+	     * browser listings now use the "nowrap" option
+	     * browser: some unuseful error messages now suppressed
+	v54: * For backwards compatibility, Explore and Sexplore have been
+	       implemented.  In addition, Hexplore and Vexplore commands
+	       are available, too.
+	     * <amatch> used instead of <afile> in the transparency
+	       support (BufReadCmd, FileReadCmd, FileWriteCmd)
+	     * ***netrw*** prepended to various error messages netrw may emit
+	     * g:netrw_port used instead of b:netrw_port for scp
+	     * any leading [:#] is removed from port numbers
+	v53: * backslashes as well as slashes placed in various patterns
+	       (ex. g:netrw_sort_sequence) to better support Windows
 	v52: * nonumber'ing now set for browsing buffers
 	     * when the hiding list hid all files, error messages ensued. Fixed
 	     * when browsing, swf is set, but directory is not set, when netrw
@@ -1120,4 +1263,4 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).
 	Doug Claar		-- modifications to test for success with ftp operation
 
 ==============================================================================
- vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:fdm=marker

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 01
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -110,6 +110,11 @@ The following quickfix commands can be used:
 			Read the error file.  Just like ":cfile" but don't
 			jump to the first error.
 
+							*:cad* *:caddfile*
+:cad[dfile] [errorfile]	Read the error file and add the errors from the
+			errorfile to the current quickfix list. If a quickfix
+			list is not present, then a new list is created.
+
 						*:cb* *:cbuffer* *E681*
 :cb[uffer] [bufnr]	Read the error list from the current buffer.
 			When [bufnr] is given it must be the number of a
@@ -118,6 +123,19 @@ The following quickfix commands can be used:
 			A range can be specified for the lines to be used.
 			Otherwise all lines in the buffer are used.
 
+							*:cex* *:cexpr*
+:cex[pr][!] {expr}	Create a quickfix list using the result of {expr}.
+			If {expr} is a String, then each new-line terminated
+			line in the String is processed using 'errorformat'
+			and the result is added to the quickfix list.
+			If {expr} is a List, then each String item in the list
+			is processed and added to the quickfix list.
+			Non String items in the List are ignored. See |:cc|
+			for [!].
+			Examples: >
+				:cexpr system('grep -n xyz *')
+				:cexpr getline(1, '$')
+<
 							*:cl* *:clist*
 :cl[ist] [from] [, [to]]
 			List all errors that are valid |quickfix-valid|.
@@ -334,6 +352,8 @@ advantages are:
 			Examples: >
 				:vimgrep /an error/ *.c
 				:vimgrep /\<FileName\>/ *.h include/*
+				:vimgrep /myfunc/ **/*.c
+<			For the use of "**" see |starstar-wildcard|.
 
 :vim[grep][!] {pattern} {file} ...
 			Like above, but instead of enclosing the pattern in a
@@ -611,7 +631,8 @@ Basic items
 	%%		the single '%' character
 	%s		search text (finds a string)
 
-The "%f" conversion depends on the current 'isfname' setting.
+The "%f" conversion depends on the current 'isfname' setting.  "~/" is
+expanded to the home directory and environment variables are expanded.
 
 The "%f" and "%m" conversions have to detect the end of the string.  They
 should be followed by a character that cannot be in the string.  Everything

runtime/doc/quickref.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 01
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -686,8 +686,10 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 |'foldnestmax'|   |'fdn'|    maximum fold depth
 |'foldopen'|	  |'fdo'|    for which commands a fold will be opened
 |'foldtext'|	  |'fdt'|    expression used to display for a closed fold
+|'formatlistpat'| |'flp'|    pattern used to recognize a list header
 |'formatoptions'| |'fo'|     how automatic formatting is to be done
 |'formatprg'|	  |'fp'|     name of external program used with "gq" command
+|'fsync'|	  |'fs'|     whether to invoke fsync() after file write
 |'gdefault'|	  |'gd'|     the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on
 |'grepformat'|	  |'gfm'|    format of 'grepprg' output
 |'grepprg'|	  |'gp'|     program to use for ":grep"
@@ -814,6 +816,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 |'shellquote'|	  |'shq'|    quote character(s) for around shell command
 |'shellredir'|	  |'srr'|    string to put output of filter in a temp file
 |'shellslash'|	  |'ssl'|    use forward slash for shell file names
+|'shelltemp'|	  |'stmp'|   whether to use a temp file for shell commands
 |'shelltype'|	  |'st'|     Amiga: influences how to use a shell
 |'shellxquote'|	  |'sxq'|    like 'shellquote', but include redirection
 |'shiftround'|	  |'sr'|     round indent to multiple of shiftwidth
@@ -831,6 +834,11 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 |'smartindent'|   |'si'|     smart autoindenting for C programs
 |'smarttab'|	  |'sta'|    use 'shiftwidth' when inserting <Tab>
 |'softtabstop'|	  |'sts'|    number of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing
+|'spell'|		     enable spell checking
+|'spellcapcheck'| |'spc'|    pattern to locate end of a sentence
+|'spellfile'|	  |'spf'|    files where |zg| and |zw| store words
+|'spelllang'|	  |'spl'|    language(s) to do spell checking for
+|'spellsuggest'|  |'sps'|    method(s) used to suggest spelling corrections
 |'splitbelow'|	  |'sb'|     new window from split is below the current one
 |'splitright'|	  |'spr'|    new window is put right of the current one
 |'startofline'|   |'sol'|    commands move cursor to first blank in line
@@ -840,6 +848,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 |'swapfile'|	  |'swf'|    whether to use a swapfile for a buffer
 |'swapsync'|	  |'sws'|    how to sync the swap file
 |'switchbuf'|	  |'swb'|    sets behavior when switching to another buffer
+|'synmaxcol'|	  |'smc'|    maximum column to find syntax items
 |'syntax'|	  |'syn'|    syntax to be loaded for current buffer
 |'tabstop'|	  |'ts'|     number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses
 |'tagbsearch'|	  |'tbs'|    use binary searching in tags files
@@ -875,6 +884,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 |'updatecount'|   |'uc'|     after this many characters flush swap file
 |'updatetime'|	  |'ut'|     after this many milliseconds flush swap file
 |'verbose'|	  |'vbs'|    give informative messages
+|'verbosefile'|	  |'vfile'|  file to write messages in
 |'viewdir'|	  |'vdir'|   directory where to store files with :mkview
 |'viewoptions'|   |'vop'|    specifies what to save for :mkview
 |'viminfo'|	  |'vi'|     use .viminfo file upon startup and exiting
@@ -888,6 +898,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 |'wildignore'|	  |'wig'|    files matching these patterns are not completed
 |'wildmenu'|	  |'wmnu'|   use menu for command line completion
 |'wildmode'|	  |'wim'|    mode for 'wildchar' command-line expansion
+|'wildoptions'|   |'wop'|    specifies how command line completion is done.
 |'winaltkeys'|	  |'wak'|    when the windows system handles ALT keys
 |'winheight'|	  |'wh'|     minimum number of lines for the current window
 |'winfixheight'|  |'wfh'|    keep window height when opening/closing windows
@@ -922,6 +933,11 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 |:cprevious|	:cp		display the previous error
 |:clist|	:cl		list all errors
 |:cfile|	:cf		read errors from the file 'errorfile'
+|:cgetfile|	:cg		like :cfile but don't jump to the first error
+|:caddfile|	:cad		add errors from the error file to the current
+				   quickfix list
+|:cbuffer|	:cb		read errors from text in a buffer
+|:cexpr|	:cex		read errors from an expression
 |:cquit|	:cq		quit without writing and return error code (to
 				   the compiler)
 |:make|		:make [args]	start make, read errors, and jump to first

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 01
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jun 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ first line has something like ":map <F1> :help^M", where "^M" is a <CR>.  If
 the first line ends in a <CR>, but following ones don't, you will get an error
 message, because the <CR> from the first lines will be lost.
 
-Macintosh: Files that are read with ":source" normally have <CR> <EOL>s.
+Mac Classic: Files that are read with ":source" normally have <CR> <EOL>s.
 These always work.  If you are using a file with <NL> <EOL>s (for example, a
 file made on Unix), this will be recognized if 'fileformats' is not empty and
 the first line does not end in a <CR>.  Be careful not to use a file with <NL>
@@ -515,6 +515,9 @@ DELETING BREAKPOINTS
 		Delete breakpoint {nr}.  Use |:breaklist| to see the number of
 		each breakpoint.
 
+:breakd[el] *
+		Delete all breakpoints.
+
 :breakd[el] func [lnum] {name}
 		Delete a breakpoint in a function.
 
@@ -576,6 +579,11 @@ It is only included when Vim was compiled with "huge" features.
 		this command.
 
 
+:profd[el] ...						*:profd* *:profdel*
+		Stop profiling for the arguments specified. See |:breakdel|
+		for the arguments.
+
+
 You must always start with a ":profile start fname" command.  The resulting
 file is written when Vim exits.  Here is an example of the output, with line
 numbers prepended for the explanation:

runtime/doc/spell.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*spell.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 24
+*spell.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -7,8 +7,9 @@
 Spell checking						*spell*
 
 1. Quick start			|spell-quickstart|
-2. Generating a spell file	|spell-mkspell|
-9. Spell file format		|spell-file-format|
+2. Remarks on spell checking	|spell-remarks|
+3. Generating a spell file	|spell-mkspell|
+4. Spell file format		|spell-file-format|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
@@ -25,23 +26,30 @@ This command switches on spell checking: >
 This switches on the 'spell' option and specifies to check for US English.
 
 The words that are not recognized are highlighted with one of these:
-	SpellBad	word not recognized
-	SpellRare	rare word
-	SpellLocal	wrong spelling for selected region
+	SpellBad	word not recognized			|hl-SpellBad|
+	SpellCap	word not capitalised			|hl-SpellCap|
+	SpellRare	rare word				|hl-SpellRare|
+	SpellLocal	wrong spelling for selected region	|hl-SpellLocal|
 
 Vim only checks words for spelling, there is no grammar check.
 
+If the 'mousemodel' option is set to "popup" and the cursor is on a badly
+spelled word or it is "popup_setpos" and the mouse pointer is on a badly
+spelled word, then the popup menu will contain an submenu to replace the bad
+word.  Note: this slows down the appearance of the popup menu.
+
 To search for the next misspelled word:
 
 							*]s* *E756*
 ]s			Move to next misspelled word after the cursor.
 			A count before the command can be used to repeat.
-			This uses the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters from syntax
-			highlighting, see |spell-syntax|.
 
 							*[s*
 [s			Like "]s" but search backwards, find the misspelled
-			word before the cursor.
+			word before the cursor.  Doesn't recognize words
+			split over two lines, thus may stop at words that are
+			not highlighted as bad.  Does not stop at word with
+			missing capital at the start of a line.
 
 							*]S*
 ]S			Like "]s" but only stop at bad words, not at rare
@@ -51,14 +59,112 @@ To search for the next misspelled word:
 [S			Like "]S" but search backwards.
 
 
+To add words to your own word list:				*E764*
+
+							*zg*
+zg			Add word under the cursor as a good word to the first
+			name in 'spellfile'.  In Visual mode the selected
+			characters are added as a word (including white
+			space!).  If the word is explicitly marked as bad word
+			in another spell file the result is unpredictable.
+			A count may precede the command to indicate the entry
+			in 'spellfile' to be used.  A count of two uses the
+			second entry.
+
+							*zG*
+zG			Like "zg" but add the word to the internal word list
+			|internal-wordlist|.
+
+							*zw*
+zw			Like "zg" but mark the word as a wrong (bad) word.
+
+							*zW*
+zW			Like "zw" but add the word to the internal word list
+			|internal-wordlist|.
+
+							*:spe* *:spellgood*
+:[count]spe[llgood] {word}
+			Add {word} as a good word to 'spellfile', like with
+			"zg".  Without count the first name is used, with a
+			count of two the second entry, etc.
+
+:spe[llgood]! {word}	Add {word} as a good word to the internal word list,
+			like with "zG".
+
+							*:spellw* *:spellwrong*
+:[count]spellw[rong] {word}
+			Add {word} as a wrong (bad) word to 'spellfile', as
+			with "zw".  Without count the first name is used, with
+			a count of two the second entry, etc.
+
+:spellw[rong]! {word}	Add {word} as a wrong (bad) word to the internal word
+			list.
+
+After adding a word to 'spellfile' with the above commands its associated
+".spl" file will automatically be updated and reloaded.  If you change
+'spellfile' manually you need to use the |:mkspell| command.  This sequence of
+commands mostly works well: >
+	:edit <file in 'spellfile'>
+<	(make changes to the spell file) >
+	:mkspell! %
+
+More details about the 'spellfile' format below |spell-wordlist-format|.
+
+							*internal-wordlist*
+The internal word list is used for all buffers where 'spell' is set.  It is
+not stored, it is lost when you exit Vim.  It is also cleared when 'encoding'
+is set.
+
+
+Finding suggestions for bad words:
+							*z?*
+z?			For the word under/after the cursor suggest correctly
+			spelled words.  This also works to find alternatives
+			for a word that is not highlighted as a bad word,
+			e.g., when the word after it is bad.
+			The results are sorted on similarity to the word
+			under/after the cursor.
+			This may take a long time.  Hit CTRL-C when you are
+			bored.
+			This does not work when there is a line break halfway
+			a bad word (e.g., "the the").
+			You can enter the number of your choice or press
+			<Enter> if you don't want to replace.  You can also
+			use the mouse to click on your choice (only works if
+			the mouse can be used in Normal mode and when there
+			are no line wraps).  Click on the first (header) line
+			to cancel.
+			If 'verbose' is non-zero a score will be displayed to
+			indicate the likeliness to the badly spelled word (the
+			higher the score the more different).
+			When a word was replaced the redo command "." will
+			repeat the word replacement.  This works like "ciw",
+			the good word and <Esc>.
+
+					*:spellr* *:spellrepall* *E752* *E753*
+:spellr[epall]		Repeat the replacement done by |z?| for all matches
+			with the replaced word in the current window.
+
+The 'spellsuggest' option influences how the list of suggestions is generated
+and sorted.  See |'spellsuggest'|.
+
+The 'spellcapcheck' option is used to check the first word of a sentence
+starts with a capital.  This doesn't work for the first word in the file.
+When there is a line break right after a sentence the highlighting of the next
+line may be postponed.  Use |CTRL-L| when needed.
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Remarks on spell checking				*spell-remarks*
+
 PERFORMANCE
 
-Note that Vim does on-the-fly spellchecking.  To make this work fast the
-word list is loaded in memory.  Thus this uses a lot of memory (1 Mbyte or
-more).  There might also be a noticable delay when the word list is loaded,
-which happens when 'spelllang' is set.  Each word list is only loaded once,
-they are not deleted when 'spelllang' is made empty.  When 'encoding' is set
-the word lists are reloaded, thus you may notice a delay then too.
+Vim does on-the-fly spell checking.  To make this work fast the word list is
+loaded in memory.  Thus this uses a lot of memory (1 Mbyte or more).  There
+might also be a noticeable delay when the word list is loaded, which happens
+when 'spell' is set and when 'spelllang' is set while 'spell' was already set.
+To minimize the delay each word list is only loaded once, it is not deleted
+when 'spelllang' is made empty or 'spell' is reset.  When 'encoding' is set
+all the word lists are reloaded, thus you may notice a delay then too.
 
 
 REGIONS
@@ -74,26 +180,71 @@ comes in (at least) these variants:
 	en_us		USA
 
 Words that are not used in one region but are used in another region are
-highlighted with SpellLocal.
+highlighted with SpellLocal |hl-SpellLocal|.
 
 Always use lowercase letters for the language and region names.
 
+When adding a word with |zg| or another command it's always added for all
+regions.  You can change that by manually editing the 'spellfile'.  See
+|spell-wordlist-format|.  Note that the regions as specified in the files in
+'spellfile' are only used when all entries in "spelllang" specify the same
+region (not counting files specified by their .spl name).
 
-SPELL FILES
+
+SPELL FILES						*spell-load*
 
 Vim searches for spell files in the "spell" subdirectory of the directories in
-'runtimepath'.  The name is: LL-XXX.EEE.spl, where:
+'runtimepath'.  The name is: LL.EEE.spl, where:
 	LL	the language name
-	-XXX	optional addition
 	EEE	the value of 'encoding'
 
+The value for "LL" comes from 'spelllang', but excludes the region name.
+Examples:
+	'spelllang'	LL ~
+	en_us		en
+	en-rare		en-rare
+	medical_ca	medical
+
+Only the first file is loaded, the one that is first in 'runtimepath'.  If
+this succeeds then additionally files with the name LL.EEE.add.spl are loaded.
+All the ones that are found are used.
+
+Additionally, the files related to the names in 'spellfile' are loaded.  These
+are the files that |zg| and |zw| add good and wrong words to.
+
 Exceptions:
 - Vim uses "latin1" when 'encoding' is "iso-8859-15".  The euro sign doesn't
   matter for spelling.
 - When no spell file for 'encoding' is found "ascii" is tried.  This only
   works for languages where nearly all words are ASCII, such as English.  It
   helps when 'encoding' is not "latin1", such as iso-8859-2, and English text
-  is being edited.
+  is being edited.  For the ".add" files the same name as the found main
+  spell file is used.
+
+For example, with these values:
+	'runtimepath' is "~/.vim,/usr/share/vim70,~/.vim/after"
+	'encoding'    is "iso-8859-2"
+	'spelllang'   is "pl"
+
+Vim will look for:
+1. ~/.vim/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.spl
+2. /usr/share/vim70/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.spl
+3. ~/.vim/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.add.spl
+4. /usr/share/vim70/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.add.spl
+5. ~/.vim/after/spell/pl.iso-8859-2.add.spl
+
+This assumes 1. is not found and 2. is found.
+
+If 'encoding' is "latin1" Vim will look for:
+1. ~/.vim/spell/pl.latin1.spl
+2. /usr/share/vim70/spell/pl.latin1.spl
+3. ~/.vim/after/spell/pl.latin1.spl
+4. ~/.vim/spell/pl.ascii.spl
+5. /usr/share/vim70/spell/pl.ascii.spl
+6. ~/.vim/after/spell/pl.ascii.spl
+
+This assumes none of them are found (Polish doesn't make sense when leaving
+out the non-ASCII characters).
 
 Spelling for EBCDIC is currently not supported.
 
@@ -114,7 +265,31 @@ Vim uses a fixed method to recognize a word.  This is independent of
 include characters like '-' in 'iskeyword'.  The word characters do depend on
 'encoding'.
 
-A word that starts with a digit is always ignored.
+The table with word characters is stored in the main .spl file.  Therefore it
+matters what the current locale is when generating it!  A .add.spl file does
+not contain a word table though.
+
+A word that starts with a digit is always ignored.  That includes hex numbers
+in the form 0xff and 0XFF.
+
+
+WORD COMBINATIONS
+
+It is possible to spell-check words that include a space.  This is used to
+recognize words that are invalid when used by themselves, e.g. for "et al.".
+It can also be used to recognize "the the" and highlight it.
+
+The number of spaces is irrelevant.  In most cases a line break may also
+appear.  However, this makes it difficult to find out where to start checking
+for spelling mistakes.  When you make a change to one line and only that line
+is redrawn Vim won't look in the previous line, thus when "et" is at the end
+of the previous line "al." will be flagged as an error.  And when you type
+"the<CR>the" the highlighting doesn't appear until the first line is redrawn.
+Use |CTRL-L| to redraw right away.  "[s" will also stop at a word combination
+with a line break.
+
+When encountering a line break Vim skips characters such as '*', '>' and '"',
+so that comments in C, shell and Vim code can be spell checked.
 
 
 SYNTAX HIGHLIGHTING					*spell-syntax*
@@ -122,49 +297,111 @@ SYNTAX HIGHLIGHTING					*spell-syntax*
 Files that use syntax highlighting can specify where spell checking should be
 done:
 
-   everywhere			   default
-   in specific items		   use "contains=@Spell"
-   everywhere but specific items   use "contains=@NoSpell"
+1.  everywhere			   default
+2.  in specific items		   use "contains=@Spell"
+3.  everywhere but specific items  use "contains=@NoSpell"
 
-Note that mixing @Spell and @NoSpell doesn't make sense.
+For the second method adding the @NoSpell cluster will disable spell checking
+again.  This can be used, for example, to add @Spell to the comments of a
+program, and add @NoSpell for items that shouldn't be checked.
+
+
+VIM SCRIPTS
+
+If you want to write a Vim script that does something with spelling, you may
+find these functions useful:
+
+    spellbadword()	find badly spelled word at the cursor
+    spellsuggest()	get list of spelling suggestions
+    soundfold()		get the sound-a-like version of a word
 
 ==============================================================================
-2. Generating a spell file				*spell-mkspell*
+3. Generating a spell file				*spell-mkspell*
 
 Vim uses a binary file format for spelling.  This greatly speeds up loading
 the word list and keeps it small.
-
+						    *.aff* *.dic* *Myspell*
 You can create a Vim spell file from the .aff and .dic files that Myspell
 uses.  Myspell is used by OpenOffice.org and Mozilla.  You should be able to
 find them here:
 	http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/spell_dic.html
+You can also use a plain word list.  The results are the same, the choice
+depends on what word lists you can find.
+
+If you install Aap (from www.a-a-p.org) you can use the recipes in the
+runtime/spell/??/ directories.  Aap will take care of downloading the files,
+apply patches needed for Vim and build the .spl file.
+
+Make sure your current locale is set properly, otherwise Vim doesn't know what
+characters are upper/lower case letters.  If the locale isn't available (e.g.,
+when using an MS-Windows codepage on Unix) add tables to the .aff file
+|spell-affix-chars|.  If the .aff file doesn't define a table then the word
+table of the currently active spelling is used.  If spelling is not active
+then Vim will try to guess.
+
+							*:mksp* *:mkspell*
+:mksp[ell][!] [-ascii] {outname} {inname} ...
+			Generate a Vim spell file word lists.  Example: >
+		:mkspell /tmp/nl nl_NL.words
+<								*E751*
+			When {outname} ends in ".spl" it is used as the output
+			file name.  Otherwise it should be a language name,
+			such as "en", without the region name.  The file
+			written will be "{outname}.{encoding}.spl", where
+			{encoding} is the value of the 'encoding' option.
+
+			When the output file already exists [!] must be used
+			to overwrite it.
 
-:mksp[ell] [-ascii] {outname} {inname} ...		*:mksp* *:mkspell*
-			Generate spell file {outname}.spl from Myspell files
-			{inname}.aff and {inname}.dic.
 			When the [-ascii] argument is present, words with
 			non-ascii characters are skipped.  The resulting file
-			ends in "ascii.spl".  Otherwise the resulting file
-			ends in "ENC.spl", where ENC is the value of
-			'encoding'.
+			ends in "ascii.spl".
+
+			The input can be the Myspell format files {inname}.aff
+			and {inname}.dic.  If {inname}.aff does not exist then
+			{inname} is used as the file name of a plain word
+			list.
+
 			Multiple {inname} arguments can be given to combine
 			regions into one Vim spell file.  Example: >
 		:mkspell ~/.vim/spell/en /tmp/en_US /tmp/en_CA /tmp/en_AU
 <			This combines the English word lists for US, CA and AU
 			into one en.spl file.
 			Up to eight regions can be combined. *E754* *755*
+			The REP and SAL items of the first .aff file where
+			they appear are used. |spell-affix-REP|
+			|spell-affix-SAL|
 
-Since you might want to change the word list for use with Vim the following
-procedure is recommended:
+			This command uses a lot of memory, required to find
+			the optimal word tree (Polish requires a few hundred
+			Mbyte).  The final result will be much smaller.
+
+			After the spell file was written and it was being used
+			in a buffer it will be reloaded automatically.
+
+:mksp[ell] [-ascii] {name}.{enc}.add
+			Like ":mkspell" above, using {name}.{enc}.add as the
+			input file and producing an output file in the same
+			directory that has ".spl" appended.
+
+:mksp[ell] [-ascii] {name}
+			Like ":mkspell" above, using {name} as the input file
+			and producing an output file in the same directory
+			that has ".{enc}.spl" appended.
+
+Since you might want to change a Myspell word list for use with Vim the
+following procedure is recommended:
 
 1. Obtain the xx_YY.aff and xx_YY.dic files from Myspell.
 2. Make a copy of these files to xx_YY.orig.aff and xx_YY.orig.dic.
 3. Change the xx_YY.aff and xx_YY.dic files to remove bad words, add missing
    words, define word characters with FOL/LOW/UPP, etc.  The distributed
    "src/spell/*.diff" files can be used.
-4. Set 'encoding' to the desired encoding and use |:mkspell| to generate the
-   Vim spell file.
-5. Try out the spell file with ":set spell spelllang=xx_YY".
+4. Start Vim with the right locale and use |:mkspell| to generate the Vim
+   spell file.
+5. Try out the spell file with ":set spell spelllang=xx" if you wrote it in
+   a spell directory in 'runtimepath', or ":set spelllang=xx.enc.spl" if you
+   wrote it somewhere else.
 
 When the Myspell files are updated you can merge the differences:
 1. Obtain the new Myspell files as xx_YY.new.aff and xx_UU.new.dic.
@@ -174,18 +411,96 @@ When the Myspell files are updated you can merge the differences:
    You may also need to change xx_YY.aff.
 4. Rename xx_YY.new.dic to xx_YY.orig.dic and xx_YY.new.aff to xx_YY.new.aff.
 
+
+SPELL FILE DUMP
+
+If for some reason you want to check what words are supported by the currently
+used spelling files, use this command:
+
+							*:spelldump* *:spelld*
+:spelld[ump]		Open a new window and fill it with all currently valid
+			words.
+			Note: For some languages the result may be enormous,
+			causing Vim to run out of memory.
+
+The format of the word list is used |spell-wordlist-format|.  You should be
+able to read it with ":mkspell" to generate one .spl file that includes all
+the words.
+
+When all entries to 'spelllang' use the same regions or no regions at all then
+the region information is included in the dumped words.  Otherwise only words
+for the current region are included and no "/regions" line is generated.
+
+Comment lines with the name of the .spl file are used as a header above the
+words that were generated from that .spl file.
+
 ==============================================================================
-9. Spell file format					*spell-file-format*
+4. Spell file format					*spell-file-format*
 
 This is the format of the files that are used by the person who creates and
 maintains a word list.
 
 Note that we avoid the word "dictionary" here.  That is because the goal of
 spell checking differs from writing a dictionary (as in the book).  For
-spelling we need a list of words that are OK, thus need not to be highlighted.
-Names will not appear in a dictionary, but do appear in a word list.  And
-some old words are rarely used and are common misspellings.  These do appear
-in a dictionary but not in a word list.
+spelling we need a list of words that are OK, thus should not to be
+highlighted.  Person and company names will not appear in a dictionary, but do
+appear in a word list.  And some old words are rarely used while they are
+common misspellings.  These do appear in a dictionary but not in a word list.
+
+There are two formats: A straight list of words and a list using affix
+compression.  The files with affix compression are used by Myspell (Mozilla
+and OpenOffice.org).  This requires two files, one with .aff and one with .dic
+extension.
+
+
+FORMAT OF STRAIGHT WORD LIST				*spell-wordlist-format*
+
+The words must appear one per line.  That is all that is required.
+
+Additionally the following items are recognized:
+
+- Empty and blank lines are ignored.
+
+- Lines starting with a # are ignored (comment lines).
+
+- A line starting with "/encoding=", before any word, specifies the encoding
+  of the file.  After the second '=' comes an encoding name.  This tells Vim
+  to setup conversion from the specified encoding to 'encoding'.  Thus you can
+  use one word list for several target encodings.
+
+- A line starting with "/regions=" specifies the region names that are
+  supported.  Each region name must be two ASCII letters.  The first one is
+  region 1.  Thus "/regions=usca" has region 1 "us" and region 2 "ca".
+  In an addition word list the region names should be equal to the main word
+  list!
+
+- Other lines starting with '/' are reserved for future use.  The ones that
+  are not recognized are ignored (but you do get a warning message).
+
+- A "/" may follow the word with the following items:
+    =   	Case must match exactly.
+    ?		Rare word.
+    !		Bad (wrong) word.
+    digit	A region in which the word is valid.  If no regions are
+    		specified the word is valid in all regions.
+
+Example:
+
+	# This is an example word list		comment
+	/encoding=latin1			encoding of the file
+	/regions=uscagb				regions "us", "ca" and "gb"
+	example					word for all regions
+	blah/12					word for regions "us" and "ca"
+	vim/!					bad word
+	Campbell/?3				rare word in region 3 "gb"
+	's mornings/=				keep-case word
+
+Note that when "/=" is used the same word with all upper-case letters is not
+accepted.  This is different from a word with mixed case that is automatically
+marked as keep-case, those words may appear in all upper-case letters.
+
+
+FORMAT WITH AFFIX COMPRESSION
 
 There are two files: the basic word list and an affix file.  The affixes are
 used to modify the basic words to get the full word list.  This significantly
@@ -197,6 +512,7 @@ Myspell uses (the spell checker of Mozilla and OpenOffice.org).  A description
 can be found here:
 	http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/affix.readme ~
 Note that affixes are case sensitive, this isn't obvious from the description.
+
 Vim supports a few extras.  Hopefully Myspell will support these too some day.
 See |spell-affix-vim|.
 
@@ -210,7 +526,7 @@ them before the Vim word list is made.  The tools for this can be found in the
 "src/spell" directory.
 
 
-WORD LIST FORMAT					*spell-wordlist-format*
+WORD LIST FORMAT				*spell-dic-format*
 
 A very short example, with line numbers:
 
@@ -225,10 +541,11 @@ A very short example, with line numbers:
 	9	kado/1
 	10	cadeau/2
 
-The first line contains the number of words.  Vim ignores it.  *E760*
+The first line contains the number of words.  Vim ignores it, but you do get
+an error message if it's not there.  *E760*
 
-What follows is one word per line.  There should be no white space after the
-word.
+What follows is one word per line.  There should be no white space before or
+after the word.
 
 When the word only has lower-case letters it will also match with the word
 starting with an upper-case letter.
@@ -238,7 +555,7 @@ is required at this position.  The same word with a lower-case letter at this
 position will not match. When some of the other letters are upper-case it will
 not match either.
 
-The same word with all upper-case characters will always be OK.
+The word with all upper-case characters will always be OK.
 
 	word list	matches			does not match ~
 	als		als Als ALS		ALs AlS aLs aLS
@@ -246,22 +563,31 @@ The same word with all upper-case characters will always be OK.
 	ALS		ALS			als Als ALs AlS aLs aLS
 	AlS		AlS ALS			als Als ALs aLs aLS
 
+The KEP affix ID can be used to specifically match a word with identical case
+only, see below |spell-affix-KEP|.
+
 Note in line 5 to 7 that non-word characters are used.  You can include
 any character in a word.  When checking the text a word still only matches
 when it appears with a non-word character before and after it.  For Myspell a
 word starting with a non-word character probably won't work.
 
 After the word there is an optional slash and flags.  Most of these flags are
-letters that indicate the affixes that can be used with this word.
+letters that indicate the affixes that can be used with this word.  These are
+specified with SFX and PFX lines in the .aff file.  See the Myspell
+documentation.
 
 							*spell-affix-vim*
-A flag that Vim adds and is not in Myspell is the "=" flag.  This has the
-meaning that case matters.  This can be used if the word does not have the
-first letter in upper case at the start of a sentence.  Example:
+A flag that Vim adds and is not in Myspell is the flag defined with KEP in the
+affix file.  This has the meaning that case matters.  This can be used if the
+word does not have the first letter in upper case at the start of a sentence.
+Example (assuming that = was used for KEP):
 
-	word list	matches			does not match ~
-	's morgens/=	's morgens		'S morgens 's Morgens
-	's Morgens	's Morgens		'S morgens 's morgens
+    word list	    matches		    does not match ~
+    's morgens/=    's morgens		    'S morgens 's Morgens 'S MORGENS
+    's Morgens	    's Morgens 'S MORGENS   'S morgens 's morgens
+
+The flag can also be used to avoid that the word matches when it is in all
+upper-case letters.
 
 							*spell-affix-mbyte*
 The basic word list is normally in an 8-bit encoding, which is mentioned in
@@ -269,24 +595,24 @@ the affix file.  The affix file must always be in the same encoding as the
 word list.  This is compatible with Myspell.  For Vim the encoding may also be
 something else, any encoding that "iconv" supports.  The "SET" line must
 specify the name of the encoding.  When using a multi-byte encoding it's
-possible to use more different affixes.
+possible to use more different affixes (but Myspell doesn't support that, thus
+you may not want to use it anyway).
 
-Performance hint: Although using affixes reduces the number of words, it
-reduces the speed.  It's a good idea to put all the often used words in the
-word list with the affixes prepended/appended.
 
+CHARACTER TABLES
 							*spell-affix-chars*
-The affix file should define the word characters when using an 8-bit encoding
-(as specified with ENC).  This is because the system where ":mkspell" is used
-may not support a locale with this encoding and isalpha() won't work.  For
-example when using "cp1250" on Unix.
+When using an 8-bit encoding the affix file should define what characters are
+word characters (as specified with ENC).  This is because the system where
+":mkspell" is used may not support a locale with this encoding and isalpha()
+won't work.  For example when using "cp1250" on Unix.
 
-							*E761* *E762*
+					*E761* *E762* *spell-affix-FOL*
+					*spell-affix-LOW* *spell-affix-UPP*
 Three lines in the affix file are needed.  Simplistic example:
 
-	FOL  <20><><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>
-	LOW  <20><><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>
-	UPP  <20><><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD><EFBFBD>
+	FOL  <20><><EFBFBD> ~
+	LOW  <20><><EFBFBD> ~
+	UPP  <20><><EFBFBD> ~
 
 All three lines must have exactly the same number of characters.
 
@@ -305,10 +631,194 @@ ASCII characters should be omitted, Vim always handles these in the same way.
 When the encoding is UTF-8 no word characters need to be specified.
 
 							*E763*
-All spell files for the same encoding must use the same word characters,
-otherwise they can't be combined without errors.  The XX.ascii.spl spell file
-generated with the "-ascii" argument will not contain the table with
-characters, so that it can be combine with spell files for any encoding.
+Vim allows you to use spell checking for several languages in the same file.
+You can list them in the 'spelllang' option.  As a consequence all spell files
+for the same encoding must use the same word characters, otherwise they can't
+be combined without errors.  If you get a warning that the word tables differ
+you may need to generate the .spl file again with |:mkspell|.  Check the FOL,
+LOW and UPP lines in the used .aff file.
+
+The XX.ascii.spl spell file generated with the "-ascii" argument will not
+contain the table with characters, so that it can be combine with spell files
+for any encoding.  The .add.spl files also do not contain the table.
+
+
+MID-WORD CHARACTERS
+							*spell-midword*
+Some characters are only to be considered word characters if they are used in
+between two ordinary word characters.  An example is the single quote: It is
+often used to put text in quotes, thus it can't be recognized as a word
+character, but when it appears in between word characters it must be part of
+the word.  This is needed to detect a spelling error such as they'are.  That
+should be they're, but since "they" and "are" are words themselves that would
+go unnoticed.
+
+These characters are defined with MIDWORD in the .aff file:
+
+	MIDWORD	'- ~
+
+
+AFFIXES
+					    *spell-affix-PFX* *spell-affix-SFX*
+The usual PFX (prefix) and SFX (suffix) lines are supported (see the Myspell
+documentation or the Aspell manual:
+http://aspell.net/man-html/Affix-Compression.html).
+
+Note that Myspell ignores any extra text after the relevant info.  Vim
+requires this text to start with a "#" so that mistakes don't go unnoticed.
+Example:
+
+	SFX F 0 in   [^i]n      # Spion > Spionin  ~
+	SFX F 0 nen  in         # Bauerin > Bauerinnen ~
+
+An extra item for Vim is the "rare" flag.  It must come after the other
+fields, before a comment.  When used then all words that use the affix will be
+marked as rare words.  Example:
+
+	PFX F 0 nene  .   rare ~
+	SFX F 0 oin   n   rare   # hardly ever used ~
+
+However, if the word also appears as a good word in another way it won't be
+marked as rare.
+
+						    *spell-affix-PFXPOSTPONE*
+When an affix file has very many prefixes that apply to many words it's not
+possible to build the whole word list in memory.  This applies to Hebrew (a
+list with all words is over a Gbyte).  In that case applying prefixes must be
+postponed.  This makes spell checking slower.  It is indicated by this keyword
+in the .aff file:
+
+	PFXPOSTPONE ~
+
+Only prefixes without a chop string can be postponed, prefixes with a chop
+string will still be included in the word list.  An exception if the chop
+string is one character and equal to the last character of the added string,
+but in lower case.  Thus when the chop string is used to allow the following
+word to start with an upper case letter.
+
+
+KEEP-CASE WORDS
+							*spell-affix-KEP*
+In the affix file a KEP line can be used to define the affix name used for
+keep-case words.  Example:
+
+	KEP = ~
+
+See above for an example |spell-affix-vim|.
+
+
+RARE WORDS
+							*spell-affix-RAR*
+In the affix file a RAR line can be used to define the affix name used for
+rare words.  Example:
+
+	RAR ? ~
+
+Rare words are highlighted differently from bad words.  This is to be used for
+words that are correct for the language, but are hardly ever used and could be
+a typing mistake anyway.  When the same word is found as good it won't be
+highlighted as rare.
+
+
+BAD WORDS
+							*spell-affix-BAD*
+In the affix file a BAD line can be used to define the affix name used for
+bad words.  Example:
+
+	BAD ! ~
+
+This can be used to exclude words that would otherwise be good.  For example
+"the the" in the .dic file:
+
+	the the/! ~
+
+Once a word has been marked as bad it won't be undone by encountering the same
+word as good.
+
+
+REPLACEMENTS						*spell-affix-REP*
+
+In the affix file REP items can be used to define common mistakes.  This is
+used to make spelling suggestions.  The items define the "from" text and the
+"to" replacement.  Example:
+
+	REP 4 ~
+	REP f ph ~
+	REP ph f ~
+	REP k ch ~
+	REP ch k ~
+
+The first line specifies the number of REP lines following.  Vim ignores it.
+Don't include simple one-character replacements or swaps.  Vim will try these
+anyway.  You can include whole words if you want to, but you might want to use
+the "file:" item in 'spellsuggest' instead.
+
+
+SIMILAR CHARACTERS					*spell-affix-MAP*
+
+In the affix file MAP items can be used to define letters that are very much
+alike.  This is mostly used for a letter with different accents.  This is used
+to prefer suggestions with these letters substituted.  Example:
+
+	MAP 2 ~
+	MAP e<><65><EFBFBD><EFBFBD> ~
+	MAP u<><75><EFBFBD><EFBFBD> ~
+
+The first line specifies the number of MAP lines following.  Vim ignores it.
+
+Each letter must appear in only one of the MAP items.  It's a bit more
+efficient if the first letter is ASCII or at least one without accents.
+
+
+SOUND-A-LIKE						*spell-affix-SAL*
+
+In the affix file SAL items can be used to define the sounds-a-like mechanism
+to be used.  The main items define the "from" text and the "to" replacement.
+Simplistic example:
+
+	SAL CIA                  X ~
+	SAL CH                   X ~
+	SAL C                    K ~
+	SAL K                    K ~
+
+There are a few rules and this can become quite complicated.  An explanation
+how it works can be found in the Aspell manual:
+http://aspell.net/man-html/Phonetic-Code.html.
+
+There are a few special items:
+
+	SAL followup		true ~
+	SAL collapse_result	true ~
+	SAL remove_accents	true ~
+
+"1" has the same meaning as "true".  Any other value means "false".
+
+
+SIMPLE SOUNDFOLDING		*spell-affix-SOFOFROM* *spell-affix-SOFOTO*
+
+The SAL mechanism is complex and slow.  A simpler mechanism is mapping all
+characters to another character, mapping similar sounding characters to the
+same character.  At the same time this does case folding.  You can not have
+both SAL items and simple soundfolding.
+
+There are two items required: one to specify the characters that are mapped
+and one that specifies the characters they are mapped to.  They must have
+exactly the same number of characters.  Example:
+
+    SOFOFROM abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ~
+    SOFOTO   ebctefghejklnnepkrstevvkesebctefghejklnnepkrstevvkes ~
+
+In the example all vowels are mapped to the same character 'e'.  Another
+method would be to leave out all vowels.  Some characters that sound nearly
+the same and are often mixed up, such as 'm' and 'n', are mapped to the same
+character.  Don't do this too much, all words will start looking alike.
+
+Characters that do not appear in SOFOFROM will be left out, except that all
+white space is replaced by one space.  Sequences of the same character in
+SOFOFROM are replaced by one.
+
+You can use the |soundfold()| function to try out the results.  Or set the
+'verbose' option to see the score in the output of the |z?| command.
 
 
  vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 18
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jun 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -312,6 +312,11 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		for reading or writing a viminfo file.  Can be used to find
 		out what is happening upon startup and exit.  {not in Vi}
 
+-V[N]{filename}
+		Like -V and set 'verbosefile' to {filename}.  The result is
+		that messages are not displayed but written to the file
+		{filename}.  {filename} must not start with a digit.
+
 							*-D*
 -D		Debugging.  Go to debugging mode when executing the first
 		command from a script. |debug-mode|
@@ -706,6 +711,8 @@ accordingly.  Vim proceeds in this order:
 2. Process the arguments
 	The options and file names from the command that start Vim are
 	inspected.  Buffers are created for all files (but not loaded yet).
+	The |-V| argument can be used to display or log what happens next,
+	useful for debugging the initializations.
 
 3. Execute Ex commands, from environment variables and/or files
 	An environment variable is read as one Ex command line, where multiple
@@ -883,7 +890,8 @@ set, it will be set to 'nocompatible'.  This has the side effect of setting or
 resetting other options (see 'compatible').  But only the options that have
 not been set or reset will be changed.  This has the same effect like the
 value of 'compatible' had this value when starting Vim.  Note that this
-doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc file.
+doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc file.  It does also happen for gvimrc
+files.
 
 But there is a side effect of setting or resetting 'compatible' at the moment
 a .vimrc file is found: Mappings are interpreted the moment they are

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 May 18
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -399,7 +399,8 @@ Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
    :unlet html_number_lines
 
 Closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed.  If you don't want
-this, use the "zR" command before invoking 2html.
+this, use the "zR" command before invoking 2html, or use: >
+   :let html_ignore_folding = 1
 
 By default, HTML optimized for old browsers is generated.  If you prefer using
 cascading style sheets (CSS1) for the attributes (resulting in considerably
@@ -2515,17 +2516,17 @@ It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
 
 Vim understands three types of syntax items:
 
-1. Keyword.
+1. Keyword
    It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
    option.  It cannot contain other syntax items.  It will only match with a
    complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
    The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
    "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
 
-2. Match.
+2. Match
    This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
 
-3. Region.
+3. Region
    This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
    with the "end" regexp pattern.  Any other text can appear in between.  A
    "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
@@ -2564,13 +2565,30 @@ When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
 
 DEFINING CASE						*:syn-case* *E390*
 
-:sy[ntax] case [match|ignore]
+:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
 	This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
 	matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
 	"ignore".  Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
 	items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
 
 
+SPELL CHECKING						*:syn-spell*
+
+:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
+	This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
+	in a syntax item:
+
+	toplevel:	Text is spell checked.
+	notoplevel:	Text is not spell checked.
+	default:	When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
+
+	For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
+	|spell-syntax|.  When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
+	spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
+
+	To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
+
+
 DEFINING KEYWORDS					*:syn-keyword*
 
 :sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
@@ -3623,6 +3641,16 @@ specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones.  So, the
 result is like this single command has been used: >
    :hi Comment	term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
 <
+When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
+also tell where it was last set.  Example: >
+	:verbose hi Comment
+<	Comment        xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
+           Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
+
+For details about when this message is given and when it's valid see
+|:set-verbose|.  When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command
+is used will be mentioned for the default values.
+
 					*highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
 There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
 term	a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
@@ -3635,6 +3663,8 @@ the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
 
 1. highlight arguments for normal terminals
 
+					*bold* *underline* *undercurl*
+					*inverse* *italic* *standout*
 term={attr-list}			*attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
 	attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
 	following items (in any order):
@@ -3903,6 +3933,9 @@ SpecialKey	Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
 		really is.
 							*hl-SpellBad*
 SpellBad	Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
+		This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
+							*hl-SpellCap*
+SpellCap	Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
 		This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
 							*hl-SpellLocal*
 SpellLocal	Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -721,6 +721,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'smartcase'	options.txt	/*'smartcase'*
 'smartindent'	options.txt	/*'smartindent'*
 'smarttab'	options.txt	/*'smarttab'*
+'smc'	options.txt	/*'smc'*
 'smd'	options.txt	/*'smd'*
 'sn'	options.txt	/*'sn'*
 'so'	options.txt	/*'so'*
@@ -728,12 +729,18 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'sol'	options.txt	/*'sol'*
 'sourceany'	vi_diff.txt	/*'sourceany'*
 'sp'	options.txt	/*'sp'*
+'spc'	options.txt	/*'spc'*
 'spell'	options.txt	/*'spell'*
+'spellcapcheck'	options.txt	/*'spellcapcheck'*
+'spellfile'	options.txt	/*'spellfile'*
 'spelllang'	options.txt	/*'spelllang'*
+'spellsuggest'	options.txt	/*'spellsuggest'*
+'spf'	options.txt	/*'spf'*
 'spl'	options.txt	/*'spl'*
 'splitbelow'	options.txt	/*'splitbelow'*
 'splitright'	options.txt	/*'splitright'*
 'spr'	options.txt	/*'spr'*
+'sps'	options.txt	/*'sps'*
 'sr'	options.txt	/*'sr'*
 'srr'	options.txt	/*'srr'*
 'ss'	options.txt	/*'ss'*
@@ -759,6 +766,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'sws'	options.txt	/*'sws'*
 'sxq'	options.txt	/*'sxq'*
 'syn'	options.txt	/*'syn'*
+'synmaxcol'	options.txt	/*'synmaxcol'*
 'syntax'	options.txt	/*'syntax'*
 't_#2'	term.txt	/*'t_#2'*
 't_#4'	term.txt	/*'t_#4'*
@@ -937,6 +945,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'vdir'	options.txt	/*'vdir'*
 've'	options.txt	/*'ve'*
 'verbose'	options.txt	/*'verbose'*
+'verbosefile'	options.txt	/*'verbosefile'*
+'vfile'	options.txt	/*'vfile'*
 'vi'	options.txt	/*'vi'*
 'viewdir'	options.txt	/*'viewdir'*
 'viewoptions'	options.txt	/*'viewoptions'*
@@ -1003,7 +1013,6 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 ++opt	editing.txt	/*++opt*
 +ARP	various.txt	/*+ARP*
 +GUI_Athena	various.txt	/*+GUI_Athena*
-+GUI_BeOS	various.txt	/*+GUI_BeOS*
 +GUI_GTK	various.txt	/*+GUI_GTK*
 +GUI_Motif	various.txt	/*+GUI_Motif*
 +GUI_Photon	various.txt	/*+GUI_Photon*
@@ -1221,6 +1230,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 -y	starting.txt	/*-y*
 .	repeat.txt	/*.*
 .Xdefaults	gui_x11.txt	/*.Xdefaults*
+.aff	spell.txt	/*.aff*
+.dic	spell.txt	/*.dic*
 .exrc	starting.txt	/*.exrc*
 .gvimrc	gui.txt	/*.gvimrc*
 .vimrc	starting.txt	/*.vimrc*
@@ -1585,6 +1596,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 45.4	usr_45.txt	/*45.4*
 45.5	usr_45.txt	/*45.5*
 755	spell.txt	/*755*
+767	eval.txt	/*767*
 90.1	usr_90.txt	/*90.1*
 90.2	usr_90.txt	/*90.2*
 90.3	usr_90.txt	/*90.3*
@@ -1742,6 +1754,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :cabbrev	map.txt	/*:cabbrev*
 :cabc	map.txt	/*:cabc*
 :cabclear	map.txt	/*:cabclear*
+:cad	quickfix.txt	/*:cad*
+:caddfile	quickfix.txt	/*:caddfile*
 :cal	eval.txt	/*:cal*
 :call	eval.txt	/*:call*
 :cat	eval.txt	/*:cat*
@@ -1755,6 +1769,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :cd-	editing.txt	/*:cd-*
 :ce	change.txt	/*:ce*
 :center	change.txt	/*:center*
+:cex	quickfix.txt	/*:cex*
+:cexpr	quickfix.txt	/*:cexpr*
 :cf	quickfix.txt	/*:cf*
 :cfile	quickfix.txt	/*:cfile*
 :cfir	quickfix.txt	/*:cfir*
@@ -2225,6 +2241,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :print	various.txt	/*:print*
 :pro	change.txt	/*:pro*
 :prof	repeat.txt	/*:prof*
+:profd	repeat.txt	/*:profd*
+:profdel	repeat.txt	/*:profdel*
 :profile	repeat.txt	/*:profile*
 :promptfind	change.txt	/*:promptfind*
 :promptr	change.txt	/*:promptr*
@@ -2397,9 +2415,19 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :sno	change.txt	/*:sno*
 :snomagic	change.txt	/*:snomagic*
 :so	repeat.txt	/*:so*
+:sor	change.txt	/*:sor*
+:sort	change.txt	/*:sort*
 :source	repeat.txt	/*:source*
 :source_crnl	repeat.txt	/*:source_crnl*
 :sp	windows.txt	/*:sp*
+:spe	spell.txt	/*:spe*
+:spelld	spell.txt	/*:spelld*
+:spelldump	spell.txt	/*:spelldump*
+:spellgood	spell.txt	/*:spellgood*
+:spellr	spell.txt	/*:spellr*
+:spellrepall	spell.txt	/*:spellrepall*
+:spellw	spell.txt	/*:spellw*
+:spellwrong	spell.txt	/*:spellwrong*
 :split	windows.txt	/*:split*
 :split_f	windows.txt	/*:split_f*
 :spr	windows.txt	/*:spr*
@@ -2475,6 +2503,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :syn-skipempty	syntax.txt	/*:syn-skipempty*
 :syn-skipnl	syntax.txt	/*:syn-skipnl*
 :syn-skipwhite	syntax.txt	/*:syn-skipwhite*
+:syn-spell	syntax.txt	/*:syn-spell*
 :syn-start	syntax.txt	/*:syn-start*
 :syn-sync	syntax.txt	/*:syn-sync*
 :syn-sync-ccomment	syntax.txt	/*:syn-sync-ccomment*
@@ -2828,6 +2857,7 @@ Athena	gui_x11.txt	/*Athena*
 B	motion.txt	/*B*
 BeBox	os_beos.txt	/*BeBox*
 BeOS	os_beos.txt	/*BeOS*
+Bram	intro.txt	/*Bram*
 BufAdd	autocmd.txt	/*BufAdd*
 BufCreate	autocmd.txt	/*BufCreate*
 BufDelete	autocmd.txt	/*BufDelete*
@@ -3691,6 +3721,9 @@ E748	repeat.txt	/*E748*
 E749	eval.txt	/*E749*
 E75	vi_diff.txt	/*E75*
 E750	repeat.txt	/*E750*
+E751	spell.txt	/*E751*
+E752	spell.txt	/*E752*
+E753	spell.txt	/*E753*
 E754	spell.txt	/*E754*
 E756	spell.txt	/*E756*
 E758	spell.txt	/*E758*
@@ -3700,6 +3733,9 @@ E760	spell.txt	/*E760*
 E761	spell.txt	/*E761*
 E762	spell.txt	/*E762*
 E763	spell.txt	/*E763*
+E764	spell.txt	/*E764*
+E765	options.txt	/*E765*
+E766	eval.txt	/*E766*
 E77	message.txt	/*E77*
 E78	motion.txt	/*E78*
 E79	message.txt	/*E79*
@@ -3797,9 +3833,12 @@ Mac-format	editing.txt	/*Mac-format*
 Mac-format-write	editing.txt	/*Mac-format-write*
 Macintosh	os_mac.txt	/*Macintosh*
 Mark	motion.txt	/*Mark*
+MenuPopup	autocmd.txt	/*MenuPopup*
 MiNT	os_mint.txt	/*MiNT*
+Moolenaar	intro.txt	/*Moolenaar*
 MorphOS	os_amiga.txt	/*MorphOS*
 Motif	gui_x11.txt	/*Motif*
+Myspell	spell.txt	/*Myspell*
 MzScheme	if_mzsch.txt	/*MzScheme*
 N	pattern.txt	/*N*
 N%	motion.txt	/*N%*
@@ -4145,6 +4184,7 @@ asmh8300-syntax	syntax.txt	/*asmh8300-syntax*
 asmh8300.vim	syntax.txt	/*asmh8300.vim*
 aspperl-syntax	syntax.txt	/*aspperl-syntax*
 aspvbs-syntax	syntax.txt	/*aspvbs-syntax*
+at	motion.txt	/*at*
 athena-intellimouse	gui.txt	/*athena-intellimouse*
 attr-list	syntax.txt	/*attr-list*
 author	intro.txt	/*author*
@@ -4220,6 +4260,7 @@ blockwise-examples	visual.txt	/*blockwise-examples*
 blockwise-operators	visual.txt	/*blockwise-operators*
 blockwise-register	change.txt	/*blockwise-register*
 blockwise-visual	visual.txt	/*blockwise-visual*
+bold	syntax.txt	/*bold*
 book	intro.txt	/*book*
 bookmark	usr_03.txt	/*bookmark*
 boolean	options.txt	/*boolean*
@@ -4410,6 +4451,7 @@ compl-filename	insert.txt	/*compl-filename*
 compl-function	insert.txt	/*compl-function*
 compl-generic	insert.txt	/*compl-generic*
 compl-keyword	insert.txt	/*compl-keyword*
+compl-occult	insert.txt	/*compl-occult*
 compl-tag	insert.txt	/*compl-tag*
 compl-vim	insert.txt	/*compl-vim*
 compl-whole-line	insert.txt	/*compl-whole-line*
@@ -4822,7 +4864,6 @@ fcs_reason-variable	eval.txt	/*fcs_reason-variable*
 feature-list	eval.txt	/*feature-list*
 fetch	pi_netrw.txt	/*fetch*
 file-browser-5.2	version5.txt	/*file-browser-5.2*
-file-explorer	pi_netrw.txt	/*file-explorer*
 file-formats	editing.txt	/*file-formats*
 file-pattern	autocmd.txt	/*file-pattern*
 file-read	insert.txt	/*file-read*
@@ -4938,6 +4979,7 @@ g'a	motion.txt	/*g'a*
 g,	motion.txt	/*g,*
 g0	motion.txt	/*g0*
 g8	various.txt	/*g8*
+g:netrw-a	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw-a*
 g:netrw_list_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_list_cmd*
 g:netrw_list_hide	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_list_hide*
 g:netrw_rm_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rm_cmd*
@@ -4945,6 +4987,7 @@ g:netrw_rmdir_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rmdir_cmd*
 g:netrw_rmf_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rmf_cmd*
 g:var	eval.txt	/*g:var*
 g;	motion.txt	/*g;*
+g<	message.txt	/*g<*
 g<Down>	motion.txt	/*g<Down>*
 g<End>	motion.txt	/*g<End>*
 g<Home>	motion.txt	/*g<Home>*
@@ -4976,9 +5019,11 @@ g_CTRL-]	tagsrch.txt	/*g_CTRL-]*
 g`	motion.txt	/*g`*
 g`a	motion.txt	/*g`a*
 ga	various.txt	/*ga*
+garbagecollect()	eval.txt	/*garbagecollect()*
 gd	pattern.txt	/*gd*
 ge	motion.txt	/*ge*
 get()	eval.txt	/*get()*
+getbufline()	eval.txt	/*getbufline()*
 getbufvar()	eval.txt	/*getbufvar()*
 getchar()	eval.txt	/*getchar()*
 getcharmod()	eval.txt	/*getcharmod()*
@@ -5150,6 +5195,7 @@ histget()	eval.txt	/*histget()*
 histnr()	eval.txt	/*histnr()*
 history	cmdline.txt	/*history*
 hit-enter	message.txt	/*hit-enter*
+hit-enter-prompt	message.txt	/*hit-enter-prompt*
 hit-return	message.txt	/*hit-return*
 hitest.vim	syntax.txt	/*hitest.vim*
 hjkl	usr_02.txt	/*hjkl*
@@ -5176,6 +5222,7 @@ hl-Search	syntax.txt	/*hl-Search*
 hl-SignColumn	syntax.txt	/*hl-SignColumn*
 hl-SpecialKey	syntax.txt	/*hl-SpecialKey*
 hl-SpellBad	syntax.txt	/*hl-SpellBad*
+hl-SpellCap	syntax.txt	/*hl-SpellCap*
 hl-SpellLocal	syntax.txt	/*hl-SpellLocal*
 hl-SpellRare	syntax.txt	/*hl-SpellRare*
 hl-StatusLine	syntax.txt	/*hl-StatusLine*
@@ -5289,6 +5336,7 @@ i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I*
 i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K*
 i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L*
 i_CTRL-X_CTRL-N	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-N*
+i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O*
 i_CTRL-X_CTRL-P	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-P*
 i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T*
 i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U*
@@ -5383,14 +5431,18 @@ intel-itanium	syntax.txt	/*intel-itanium*
 intellimouse-wheel-problems	gui_w32.txt	/*intellimouse-wheel-problems*
 interfaces-5.2	version5.txt	/*interfaces-5.2*
 internal-variables	eval.txt	/*internal-variables*
+internal-wordlist	spell.txt	/*internal-wordlist*
 internet	intro.txt	/*internet*
 intro	intro.txt	/*intro*
 intro.txt	intro.txt	/*intro.txt*
+inverse	syntax.txt	/*inverse*
 ip	motion.txt	/*ip*
 iquote	motion.txt	/*iquote*
 is	motion.txt	/*is*
 isdirectory()	eval.txt	/*isdirectory()*
 islocked()	eval.txt	/*islocked()*
+it	motion.txt	/*it*
+italic	syntax.txt	/*italic*
 items()	eval.txt	/*items()*
 iw	motion.txt	/*iw*
 i{	motion.txt	/*i{*
@@ -5639,6 +5691,7 @@ mzscheme	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme*
 mzscheme-buffer	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-buffer*
 mzscheme-commands	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-commands*
 mzscheme-examples	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-examples*
+mzscheme-sandbox	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-sandbox*
 mzscheme-threads	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-threads*
 mzscheme-vim	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-vim*
 mzscheme-vimext	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-vimext*
@@ -5669,6 +5722,7 @@ netbeans-run	netbeans.txt	/*netbeans-run*
 netbeans-setup	netbeans.txt	/*netbeans-setup*
 netbeans-support	netbeans.txt	/*netbeans-support*
 netbeans.txt	netbeans.txt	/*netbeans.txt*
+netreadfixup	pi_netrw.txt	/*netreadfixup*
 netrw	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw*
 netrw--	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw--*
 netrw-B	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-B*
@@ -5676,13 +5730,13 @@ netrw-D	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-D*
 netrw-R	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-R*
 netrw-S	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-S*
 netrw-U	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-U*
-netrw-a	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-a*
 netrw-activate	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-activate*
 netrw-b	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-b*
 netrw-bookmark	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-bookmark*
 netrw-bookmarks	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-bookmarks*
 netrw-browse	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browse*
 netrw-browse-cmds	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browse-cmds*
+netrw-browse-intro	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browse-intro*
 netrw-browse-var	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browse-var*
 netrw-c	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-c*
 netrw-cadaver	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-cadaver*
@@ -5695,24 +5749,34 @@ netrw-d	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-d*
 netrw-debug	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-debug*
 netrw-delete	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-delete*
 netrw-dir	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-dir*
+netrw-downdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-downdir*
+netrw-edithide	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-edithide*
 netrw-ex	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ex*
+netrw-explore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-explore*
+netrw-explore-cmds	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-explore-cmds*
 netrw-file	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-file*
 netrw-fixup	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-fixup*
 netrw-ftp	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ftp*
 netrw-h	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-h*
+netrw-handler	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-handler*
 netrw-help	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-help*
 netrw-history	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-history*
+netrw-horiz	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-horiz*
 netrw-i	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-i*
 netrw-list	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-list*
-netrw-list-hack	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-list-hack*
+netrw-listbookmark	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-listbookmark*
+netrw-listhack	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-listhack*
+netrw-maps	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-maps*
 netrw-move	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-move*
 netrw-netrc	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-netrc*
 netrw-nread	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-nread*
 netrw-nwrite	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-nwrite*
 netrw-o	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-o*
 netrw-options	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-options*
+netrw-p	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p*
 netrw-passwd	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-passwd*
 netrw-path	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-path*
+netrw-preview	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-preview*
 netrw-problems	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-problems*
 netrw-protocol	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-protocol*
 netrw-q	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-q*
@@ -5720,10 +5784,14 @@ netrw-r	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-r*
 netrw-read	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-read*
 netrw-ref	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ref*
 netrw-rename	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-rename*
+netrw-reverse	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-reverse*
 netrw-s	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-s*
+netrw-sort	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-sort*
+netrw-sortsequence	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-sortsequence*
 netrw-transparent	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-transparent*
 netrw-u	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-u*
 netrw-uidpass	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-uidpass*
+netrw-updir	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-updir*
 netrw-urls	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-urls*
 netrw-v	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-v*
 netrw-var	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-var*
@@ -5784,6 +5852,7 @@ new-printing	version6.txt	/*new-printing*
 new-runtime-dir	version5.txt	/*new-runtime-dir*
 new-script	version5.txt	/*new-script*
 new-script-5.4	version5.txt	/*new-script-5.4*
+new-scroll-back	version7.txt	/*new-scroll-back*
 new-search-path	version6.txt	/*new-search-path*
 new-searchpat	version6.txt	/*new-searchpat*
 new-session-files	version5.txt	/*new-session-files*
@@ -5945,6 +6014,7 @@ print-intro	print.txt	/*print-intro*
 print-options	print.txt	/*print-options*
 print.txt	print.txt	/*print.txt*
 printcap-syntax	syntax.txt	/*printcap-syntax*
+printf()	eval.txt	/*printf()*
 printing	print.txt	/*printing*
 printing-formfeed	print.txt	/*printing-formfeed*
 profile	repeat.txt	/*profile*
@@ -6225,6 +6295,8 @@ sniff-commands	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-commands*
 sniff-compiling	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-compiling*
 sniff-intro	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-intro*
 sort()	eval.txt	/*sort()*
+sorting	change.txt	/*sorting*
+soundfold()	eval.txt	/*soundfold()*
 space	intro.txt	/*space*
 spec-customizing	pi_spec.txt	/*spec-customizing*
 spec-how-to-use-it	pi_spec.txt	/*spec-how-to-use-it*
@@ -6236,15 +6308,35 @@ spec_chglog_release_info	pi_spec.txt	/*spec_chglog_release_info*
 special-buffers	windows.txt	/*special-buffers*
 speed-up	tips.txt	/*speed-up*
 spell	spell.txt	/*spell*
+spell-affix-BAD	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-BAD*
+spell-affix-FOL	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-FOL*
+spell-affix-KEP	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-KEP*
+spell-affix-LOW	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-LOW*
+spell-affix-MAP	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-MAP*
+spell-affix-PFX	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-PFX*
+spell-affix-PFXPOSTPONE	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-PFXPOSTPONE*
+spell-affix-RAR	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-RAR*
+spell-affix-REP	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-REP*
+spell-affix-SAL	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-SAL*
+spell-affix-SFX	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-SFX*
+spell-affix-SOFOFROM	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-SOFOFROM*
+spell-affix-SOFOTO	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-SOFOTO*
+spell-affix-UPP	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-UPP*
 spell-affix-chars	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-chars*
 spell-affix-mbyte	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-mbyte*
 spell-affix-vim	spell.txt	/*spell-affix-vim*
+spell-dic-format	spell.txt	/*spell-dic-format*
 spell-file-format	spell.txt	/*spell-file-format*
+spell-load	spell.txt	/*spell-load*
+spell-midword	spell.txt	/*spell-midword*
 spell-mkspell	spell.txt	/*spell-mkspell*
 spell-quickstart	spell.txt	/*spell-quickstart*
+spell-remarks	spell.txt	/*spell-remarks*
 spell-syntax	spell.txt	/*spell-syntax*
 spell-wordlist-format	spell.txt	/*spell-wordlist-format*
 spell.txt	spell.txt	/*spell.txt*
+spellbadword()	eval.txt	/*spellbadword()*
+spellsuggest()	eval.txt	/*spellsuggest()*
 split()	eval.txt	/*split()*
 splitfind	windows.txt	/*splitfind*
 splitview	windows.txt	/*splitview*
@@ -6261,7 +6353,10 @@ sqlinformix.vim	syntax.txt	/*sqlinformix.vim*
 sscanf	eval.txt	/*sscanf*
 standard-plugin	usr_05.txt	/*standard-plugin*
 standard-plugin-list	help.txt	/*standard-plugin-list*
+standout	syntax.txt	/*standout*
 star	pattern.txt	/*star*
+starstar	editing.txt	/*starstar*
+starstar-wildcard	editing.txt	/*starstar-wildcard*
 start-of-file	pattern.txt	/*start-of-file*
 starting	starting.txt	/*starting*
 starting-amiga	starting.txt	/*starting-amiga*
@@ -6487,6 +6582,7 @@ tag	tagsrch.txt	/*tag*
 tag-!	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-!*
 tag-any-white	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-any-white*
 tag-binary-search	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-binary-search*
+tag-blocks	motion.txt	/*tag-blocks*
 tag-commands	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-commands*
 tag-details	tagsrch.txt	/*tag-details*
 tag-highlight	syntax.txt	/*tag-highlight*
@@ -6611,6 +6707,8 @@ typecorr.txt	usr_41.txt	/*typecorr.txt*
 u	undo.txt	/*u*
 uganda	uganda.txt	/*uganda*
 uganda.txt	uganda.txt	/*uganda.txt*
+undercurl	syntax.txt	/*undercurl*
+underline	syntax.txt	/*underline*
 undo	undo.txt	/*undo*
 undo-commands	undo.txt	/*undo-commands*
 undo-redo	undo.txt	/*undo-redo*
@@ -6763,6 +6861,7 @@ v_ab	motion.txt	/*v_ab*
 v_ap	motion.txt	/*v_ap*
 v_aquote	motion.txt	/*v_aquote*
 v_as	motion.txt	/*v_as*
+v_at	motion.txt	/*v_at*
 v_aw	motion.txt	/*v_aw*
 v_a{	motion.txt	/*v_a{*
 v_a}	motion.txt	/*v_a}*
@@ -6806,6 +6905,7 @@ v_ib	motion.txt	/*v_ib*
 v_ip	motion.txt	/*v_ip*
 v_iquote	motion.txt	/*v_iquote*
 v_is	motion.txt	/*v_is*
+v_it	motion.txt	/*v_it*
 v_iw	motion.txt	/*v_iw*
 v_i{	motion.txt	/*v_i{*
 v_i}	motion.txt	/*v_i}*
@@ -7053,11 +7153,13 @@ z/OS	os_390.txt	/*z\/OS*
 z<CR>	scroll.txt	/*z<CR>*
 z<Left>	scroll.txt	/*z<Left>*
 z<Right>	scroll.txt	/*z<Right>*
+z?	spell.txt	/*z?*
 zA	fold.txt	/*zA*
 zC	fold.txt	/*zC*
 zD	fold.txt	/*zD*
 zE	fold.txt	/*zE*
 zF	fold.txt	/*zF*
+zG	spell.txt	/*zG*
 zH	scroll.txt	/*zH*
 zL	scroll.txt	/*zL*
 zM	fold.txt	/*zM*
@@ -7075,6 +7177,7 @@ zOS-open-source	os_390.txt	/*zOS-open-source*
 zOS-weaknesses	os_390.txt	/*zOS-weaknesses*
 zOS-xterm	os_390.txt	/*zOS-xterm*
 zR	fold.txt	/*zR*
+zW	spell.txt	/*zW*
 zX	fold.txt	/*zX*
 z^	scroll.txt	/*z^*
 za	fold.txt	/*za*
@@ -7083,6 +7186,7 @@ zc	fold.txt	/*zc*
 zd	fold.txt	/*zd*
 ze	scroll.txt	/*ze*
 zf	fold.txt	/*zf*
+zg	spell.txt	/*zg*
 zh	scroll.txt	/*zh*
 zi	fold.txt	/*zi*
 zj	fold.txt	/*zj*
@@ -7095,6 +7199,7 @@ zr	fold.txt	/*zr*
 zs	scroll.txt	/*zs*
 zt	scroll.txt	/*zt*
 zv	fold.txt	/*zv*
+zw	spell.txt	/*zw*
 zx	fold.txt	/*zx*
 zz	scroll.txt	/*zz*
 {	motion.txt	/*{*

runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 01
+*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jul 12
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -352,6 +352,8 @@ Examples: >
 When the argument both exists literally, and match when used as a regexp, a
 literal match has a higher priority.  For example, ":tag /open" matches "open"
 before "open_file" and "file_open".
+When using a pattern case is ignored.  If you want to match case use "\C" in
+the pattern.
 
 							*tag-!*
 If the tag is in the current file this will always work.  Otherwise the

runtime/doc/term.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Mar 14
+*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jun 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -594,7 +594,6 @@ be used by Vim:
 		h	all previous modes when in a help file
 		a	all previous modes
 		r	for |hit-enter| prompt
-		A	auto-select in Visual mode
 
 The default for 'mouse' is empty, the mouse is not used.  Normally you would
 do: >

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 May 19
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Aug 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -30,45 +30,12 @@ be worked on, but only if you sponsor Vim development.  See |sponsor|.
 							*known-bugs*
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
-Problem with 'insertmode'. (Georg Dahn, 2005 April 9, expl. April 14)
-Problem with CTRL-V pasting more than one line. (Georg Dahn, 2005 April 11)
-
-Patch for setqflist() (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2005 April 11)
-
-":help \=<Tab>" doesn't find "sub-replace-\=".
-
-In an errorfile expand "~/" to home directory. (Arnout Engelen)
-
-Patch for 2html.vim to disable folding (Michael Schaap, 2005 April 12)
-
-Win32: Alt-F10 no longer working? (Bill McCarthy, April 18)
-
-Patch for if_python to make exit work better with threads. (ugo)
-
-With "wa" in 'formatoptions', backspace at start-of-line doesn't work.  It
-should delete the space at the end of the previous line. (Alan Isaac)
-
-GTK GUI: Running a script that does :vsp and :quit, causing the left scrollbar
-to appear and disappear, causes resizing. (gvcolors.vim from Charles Campbell,
-2005 April 25)
-
-Problem with ":mksession" for "vim -o "+argdel *" prog1 prog2 prog3"
-(Bill McCarthy, 2005 April 26)
-
-getreg('=') returns the result of evaluating the expression.  How to get the
-expression itself, so that it can be restored? (David Fishburn)  Perhaps use
-getreg('=', 1).  Also make setreg('=') work then.
-
-Win32: With the taskbar at the top of the screen, scrolling doesn't redraw
-properly. (Sergey Khorev, 2005 April 27)
-
 Mac unicode patch (Da Woon Jung):
 - selecting proportional font breaks display
 - UTF-8 text causes display problems.  Font replacement causes this.
 
-When 'shortmess' is empty and 'keymap' set to accents, in Insert mode CTRL-N
-may cause the hit-enter prompt.  Typing 'a then doesn't result in the accented
-character. (Ilya Dogolazky)
+Win32: Use the free downloadable compiler 7.1.  Figure out how to do debugging
+(with Agide?) and describe it. (George Reilly)
 
 autoload:
 - Add a Vim script in $VIMRUNTIME/tools that takes a file with a list of
@@ -81,116 +48,62 @@ autoload:
     helpfile doc/myscript.txt
   For the "helpfile" item ":helptags" is run.
 
-Win32: Balloon text can't contain line break.
-    Hints for multiline tooltips from Alexei Alexandrov (2005 Mar 26)
-    Patch from Sergey Khorev, 2005 Apr 11
-    Add has("balloon_multiline")
-
-setline() should accept a List.
-
-Add ":[range]sort" command.  Sort on specified field, using a regexp?  Remove
-duplicates?
-
-Patch to alternate fold highlighting.  (Anthony Iano-Fletcher, 2005 May 12)
-More levels?
-
 Awaiting response:
--   Patch for mch_FullName() also in Vim 6.3?  os_mswin.c
 -   Win32: tearoff menu window should have a scrollbar when it's taller than
     the screen.
-
-Make option like 'verbose' that writes output into a file?  Should make it
-possible to see what's happening without messing up the display.
+-   mblen(NULL, 0) also in Vim 6.3?
 
 
 PLANNED FOR VERSION 7.0:
 
--   Add SPELLCHECKER, with support for many languages.
-    - Use "engspchk" from Charles Campbell for ideas.
-    - Is it worth trying the trie structure (see code from Olaf Seibert, 2005
-      May 9)
-    - Spell checking code todo's:
-	- Implement user and project word lists.  Commands to add words and to
-	  mark words as wrong.
-	- Implement = flag in .dic: KEEPCASE for lower case word.
-	    's morgens/=  does not match 'S morgens
-	- Implement compound words?
-	- Make "en-rare" spell file.
-	  Convention: use en_US (language_region) and en-rare (language-field)
-          Add hl groups to 'spelllang'?
-	    :set spelllang=en_us,en-rare/SpellRare,en-math/SpellMath
-	- How about making suggestions?  Use an external program like aspell?
-	  Or include the myspell suggestion code in Vim?
-	- Some word lists are inefficient.  Remove affixes from a word when it
-	  results in another basic word.
-    - References MySpell library (in OpenOffice.org).
-	http://spellchecker.mozdev.org/source.html
-	http://whiteboard.openoffice.org/source/browse/whiteboard/lingucomponent/source/spellcheck/myspell/
-      author: Kevin Hendricks <kevin.hendricks@sympatico.ca>
-    - Alternative: use aspell library.
-      ispell is replaced by aspell, thus forget about ispell.
-    - More complicated: Regions with different languages?  E.g. comments in
-      English, strings in German (po file).
-    - Commands required:
-	add word to private dict: wrong and OK (in popup menu for evim)
-	    :spell good <word>	    zg
-	    :spell wrong <word>	    zw
-    - Update option window for 'spell' and 'spelllang'.
-    - Distribution: Need wordlists for many languages; "language pack"
-      Put them on the ftp site, ready to download.  Include README for
-      copyrights.
-    - Work together with OpenOffice.org to update the wordlists.  (Adri
-      Verhoef, Aad Nales)  Setup vim-spell maillist?
-    - Support for approximate-regexps will help with finding similar words
-      (agrep http://www.tgries.de/agrep/).
-    - Charles Campbell asks for method to add "contained" groups to
-      existing syntax items (to add @Spell).
-      Add ":syntax contains {pattern} add=@Spell" command?  A bit like ":syn
-      cluster" but change the contains list directly for matching syntax
-      items.
-    - Install spell files with src/main.aap.
-    Alternatives using ispell or aspell:
-    8   Add spell checking.  Use "ispell -a" somehow.
-	~/vim/patches/wm_vim-5_4d.zip  can be used as an example (includes
-	ispell inside Vim).  Gautam Iyer has an example with "aspell".
-    Patch from Marcin Dalecki, uses pipe to aspell.
+-   Occult completion: Understands the programming language and finds matches
+    that make sense.  Esp. members of classes/structs.
 
+    It's not much different from other Insert-mode completion, use the same
+    mechanism.  Use CTRL-X CTRL-O.
+    
+    Separately develop the completion logic and the UI.  When adding UI stuff
+    make it work for all completion methods.
 
--   REFACTORING: The main() function is very long.  Move parts to separate
-    functions, especially loops.  Ideas from Walter Briscoe (2003 Apr 3, 2004
-    Feb 9).
-    Move the printing stuff to hardcopy.c.
--   Improve the interface between the generic GUI code and the system-specific
-    code.  Generic code handles text window with scrollbars, system-specific
-    code menu, toolbar, etc.
--   Support using "**" in filename for ":next", ":vimgrep", etc., so that a
-    directory tree can be searched.
--   Store messages to allow SCROLLING BACK for all commands.  And other "less"
-    like commands.
--   "INTELLISENSE".  First cleanup the Insert-mode completion.
+    First cleanup the Insert-mode completion.
+    - check security of 'completefunc'.
+    - use callback to interrupt searching for matches.
+
+    UI:
+    - At first: use 'wildmenu' kind of thing.
+    - Nicer: Display the list of choices right under the place where they
+      would be inserted in a kind of meny (use scrollbar when there are many
+      alternatives).
+
+    Completion logic:
+	Use 'coupler' option to list items that connect words.  For C: ".,->".
+	In function arguments suggest variables of expected type.
+
+	Ideas from others:
 	http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=747
 	www.vim.org script 1213 (Java Development Environment) (Fuchuan Wang)
 	http://sourceforge.net/projects/insenvim
 	    of http://insenvim.sourceforge.net
+	IComplete: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=1265
+	    and http://stud4.tuwien.ac.at/~e0125672/icomplete/
 	http://cedet.sourceforge.net/intellisense.shtml (for Emacs)
 	Ivan Villanueva has something for Java.
-	Ideas from Emads:
-	    http://www.xref-tech.com/xrefactory/more_c_completion.html
-    Can't call it Intellisense, it is a trademark by Microsoft.
-    Ideas from the Vim 7 BOF at SANE:
-    - It's not possible to have one solution for all languages.  Design an
-      interface for completion plugins.  The matches can be done in a
-      Vim-script list.
-    - For interpreted languages, use the interpreter to obtain information.
-      Should work for Java (Eclipse does this), Python, Tcl, etc.
-      Richard Emberson mentioned working on an interface to Java.
-    - Check Readline for its completion interface.
-    - Use ctags for other languages.  Writing a file could trigger running
-      ctags, merging the tags of the changed file.
-    Also see "Visual Assist" http://www.wholetomato.com/products:
-    - Put the list of choices right under the place where they would be
-      inserted.
+	Emads: http://www.xref-tech.com/xrefactory/more_c_completion.html
+	Ideas from the Vim 7 BOF at SANE:
+	- It's not possible to have one solution for all languages.  Design an
+	  interface for completion plugins.  The matches can be done in a
+	  Vim-script list.
+	- For interpreted languages, use the interpreter to obtain information.
+	  Should work for Java (Eclipse does this), Python, Tcl, etc.
+	  Richard Emberson mentioned working on an interface to Java.
+	- Check Readline for its completion interface.
+	- Use ctags for other languages.  Writing a file could trigger running
+	  ctags, merging the tags of the changed file.
+	"Visual Assist" http://www.wholetomato.com/products:
+	Completion in .NET framework SharpDevelop: http://www.icsharpcode.net
+
     - Pre-expand abbreviations, show which abbrevs would match?
+
 -   UNDO TREE: keep all states of the text, don't delete undo info.
     When making a change, instead of clearing any future undo (thus redo)
     info, make a new branch.
@@ -210,12 +123,21 @@ PLANNED FOR VERSION 7.0:
     keep undo: "3h", "1d", "2w", "1y", etc.  For the file use dot and
     extension: ".filename.un~" (like swapfile but "un~" instead of "swp").
 7   Support WINDOW TABS.  Works like several pages, each with their own
-    split windows.  Patch for GTK 1.2 passed on by Christian Michon, 2004 Jan 6.
-    Don't forget to provide an "X" to close a tab.
-    Also for the console!
+    split windows.
     In Emacs these are called frames.  Could also call them "pages".
-    Use "1gt" - "99gt" to switch to a tab?
+    Use the name of the first buffer in the tab (ignoring the help window,
+    unless it's the only one).  Add a number for the window count.
+    First make it work on the console.  Use a line of text with highlighting.
+    Then add GUI Tabs for some systems.
+    Patch for GTK 1.2 passed on by Christian Michon, 2004 Jan 6.
     Simple patch for GTK by Luis M (nov 7).
+    Don't forget to provide an "X" to close a tab.
+    Implementation: keep the list of windows as-is.  When switching to another
+    tab make the buffers in the current windows hidden, save the window
+    layout, buildup the other window layout and fill with buffers.
+    Need to be able to search the windows in inactive tabs, e.g. for the
+    quickfix window.
+    Use "1gt" - "99gt" to switch to a tab?
 -   EMBEDDING: Make it possible to run Vim inside a window of another program.
     For Xwindows this can be done with XReparentWindow().
     For GTK Neil Bird has a patch to use Vim like a widget.
@@ -281,22 +203,34 @@ PLANNED FOR VERSION 7.0:
     Mattias Flodin (2004 Jul 30)
 -   In a :s command multi-byte characters should also be upper/lower cased
     with \u, \U, etc.
+8   Add a command to jump to a certain kind of tag.  Allow the user to specify
+    values for the optional fields.  E.g., ":tag size type=m".
+    Also allow specifying the file and command, so that the result of
+    taglist() can be used.
 
 Adjust src/main.aap for installing manpages like in Makefile.
 
+When editing a file with both utf-8 and latin1 text Vim always falls back to
+latin1.  Add a command to convert the latin1 characters to utf-8?
+    :unmix utf-8,latin1 filename
+Would only work when 'encoding' is utf-8.
+Also: command to search for illegal utf-8 byte sequence?
+
 Also generate the .pdb file that can be used to generate a useful crash report
 on MS-Windows. (George Reilly)
 
 Add strtol() to avoid the problems with leading zero causing octal conversion.
 
 Try new POSIX tests, made after my comments. (Geoff Clare, 2005 April 7)
-Before April 23 if possible.
+Version 1.5 is in ~/src/posix/1.5. (Lynne Canal)
 
 Add a 'tool' window: behaves like a preview window but there can be several.
 Don't count it in only_one_window(). (Alexei Alexandrov)
 
 Win32: Patch for Korean IME. (Yusung, 2005 March 21)
 
+When "= evaluation results in a List, use it as a sequence of lines.
+
 Support ":set syntax=cpp.doxygen"?  Suggested patch by Michael Geddes (9 Aug
 2004).  Should also work for 'filetype'.
 
@@ -319,9 +253,24 @@ Also place vimtutor.bat in %windir%?
 
 Add gui_mch_browsedir() for Motif, KDE and Mac OS/X.
 
-7   Add a ":cstring" command.  Works like ":cfile" but reads from a string
-    variable.  Also accept a list variable?  Patch from Yegappan Lakshmanan.
-    2005 Feb 17  Now it's ":cexpr".
+Add extra list of file locations.  A bit like the quickfix list, but there is
+one per window.  Can be used with:
+    :ltag	      list of matching tags, like :tselect
+Commands to use the location list:
+    :lnext	      next location
+    :lprevious :lNext previous location
+    :lnfile	      location in next file
+    :lNfile :lpfile   location in previous file
+    :lrewind :lfirst  first location
+    :llast	      last location
+    :ll [N]	      go to location N (current one if N omitted)
+    :lwindow	      open window with locations (separate from quickfix window)
+    :lopen	      open window with locations
+    :lclose	      close window with locations
+    :llist	      list locations
+    :lfile	      read locations from file using 'errorformat'
+    :lgetfile	      idem, don't jump to first one
+    :lbuffer	      idem, from current buffer.
 
 HTML indenting can be slow, find out why.  Any way to do some kind of
 profiling for Vim script?  At least add a function to get the current time in
@@ -379,7 +328,7 @@ Awaiting updated patches:
     7   Add "DefaultFG" and "DefaultBG" for the colors of the menu. (Marcin
 	Dalecki has a patch for Motif and Carbon)
     -   Add possibility to highlight specific columns (for Fortran).  Or put a
-	line in between columns (e.g. for 'textwidth').
+	line in between columns (e.g., for 'textwidth').
 	Patch to add 'hlcolumn' from Vit Stradal, 2004 May 20.
     8   Add functions:
 	confirm()		add "flags" argument, with 'v' for vertical
@@ -388,6 +337,7 @@ Awaiting updated patches:
 				(2003 May 13)
 	raisewin()		raise gvim window (see HierAssist patch for
 				Tcl implementation ~/vim/HierAssist/ )
+    7   Make globpath() also work with upwards search. (Brian Medley)
     7   Add patch from Benoit Cerrina to integrate Vim and Perl functions
 	better.  Now also works for Ruby (2001 Nov 10)
     -   Patch from Herculano de Lima Einloft Neto for better formatting of the
@@ -428,19 +378,12 @@ quote. (Nieko Maatjes, 2005 Jan 4)
 
 
 Vi incompatibility:
-9   In Ex mode, "u" undoes all changes, not just the last one. (John Cowan)
-8   In Ex mode, an empty file doesn't have a first line, "1p" should fail.
 8   With undo/redo only marks in the changed lines should be changed.  Other
     marks should be kept.  Vi keeps each mark at the same text, even when it
     is deleted or restored. (Webb)
     Also: A mark is lost after: make change, undo, redo and undo.
     Example: "{d''" then "u" then "d''": deletes an extra line, because the ''
     position is one line down. (Veselinovic)
-8   ":change" in a single-line file adds an empty line.  When the file used to
-    be longer a "~" line is displayed, but there really is an empty line.
-    (Haakon Riiser, 2003 Dec 3 and Dec 16)
-8   ":append" and ":insert" in an empty file add an extra empty line. (Haakon
-    Riiser, 2003 Dec 3)  Test for ML_EMPTY.
 8   When stdin is not a tty, and Vim reads commands from it, an error should
     make Vim exit.
 7   Unix Vim (not gvim): Typing CTRL-C in Ex mode should finish the line
@@ -462,6 +405,8 @@ Vi incompatibility:
 7   The ":undo" command works differently in Ex mode.  Edit a file, make some
     changes, "Q", "undo" and _all_ changes are undone, like the ":visual"
     command was one command.
+    On the other hand, an ":undo" command in an Ex script only undoes the last
+    change (e.g., use two :append commands, then :undo).
 7   The ":map" command output overwrites the command.  Perhaps it should keep
     the ":map" when it's used without arguments?
 7   CTRL-L is not the end of a section?  It is for Posix!  Make it an option.
@@ -673,7 +618,7 @@ GUI:
 9   On Solaris, creating the popup menu causes the right mouse button no
     longer to work for extending the selection. (Halevy)
 9   When running an external program, it can't always be killed with CTRL-C.
-    e.g. on Solaris 5.5, when using "K" (Keech).  Other 'guipty' problems on
+    e.g., on Solaris 5.5, when using "K" (Keech).  Other 'guipty' problems on
     Solaris 2.6. (Marley)
 9   On Solaris: Using a "-geometry" argument, bigger than the window where Vim
     is started from, causes empty lines below the cmdline. (raf)
@@ -768,7 +713,7 @@ MSDOS/DJGPP:
     sort of sleep, to avoid eating 50% of the CPU time.  Test on an unpatched
     Windows 95 system!
 8   DJGPP: when shell is bash, make fails. (Donahoe)
-7   Hitting CTRL-P twice quickly (e.g. in keyword completion) on a 8088
+7   Hitting CTRL-P twice quickly (e.g., in keyword completion) on a 8088
     machine, starts printer echo! (John Mullin).
 7   MSDOS 16 bit version can't work with COMSPEC that has an argument, e.g.:
     COMSPEC=C:\WINDOWS\COMMAND.COM /E:4096    (Bradley)
@@ -922,10 +867,6 @@ Macintosh:
     Alternate one: http://www.pramodx.20m.com/tee_for_win32.htm, but Walter
     Briscoe says it's not as good.
 8   'fillchars' doesn't work for multi-byte characters.
-9   Editing a XML file with a long line is extremely slow.  Example file from
-    Randy Parker (Dec 13).  Editing the dictionaries for engspchk plugin with
-    syntax highlighting is also very slow.
-    Limit the searching for items to a few hundred characters?
 8   Command line completion: buffers "foo.txt" and "../b/foo.txt", completing
     ":buf foo<Tab>" doesn't find the second one. (George V. Reilly)
 7   Output for ":scriptnames" and ":breaklist" should shorten the file names:
@@ -1062,6 +1003,7 @@ Macintosh:
     ":w!!" for that.
     Or ask for permission to overwrite it (if file can be made writable) and
     restore file to readonly afterwards.
+    Overwriting a file for which a swap file exists is similar issue.
 7   When compiled with "xterm_clipboard", startup can be slower and might get
     error message for invalid $DISPLAY.  Try connecting to the X server in the
     background (forked), so that Vim starts up quicker?  Connect as soon as
@@ -1302,6 +1244,8 @@ Help:
 
 
 User Friendlier:
+8   Windows install with NSIS: make it possible to do a silent install, see
+    http://nsis.sourceforge.net/Docs/Chapter4.html#4.12
 8   Windows install with install.exe: Use .exe instead of .bat files for
     links, so that command line arguments are passed on unmodified? (Walter
     Briscoe)
@@ -1327,6 +1271,36 @@ User Friendlier:
     Alternative: use BufEnter and BufLeave autocommands.
 8   make a vimtutor script for Amiga and other systems.
 7   Add the arguments for configure to the ":version" output?
+7   When Vim detects a file is being edited elsewhere and it's a gvim session
+    of the same user it should offer a "Raise" button, so that the other gvim
+    window can be displayed. (Eduard)
+
+
+Spell checking:
+9   Work together with OpenOffice.org to update the wordlists.  (Adri Verhoef,
+    Aad Nales)  Setup vim-spell maillist?
+8   Charles Campbell asks for method to add "contained" groups to existing
+    syntax items (to add @Spell).
+    Add ":syntax contains {pattern} add=@Spell" command?  A bit like ":syn
+    cluster" but change the contains list directly for matching syntax items.
+8   Install spell files with src/main.aap.
+-   References: MySpell library (in OpenOffice.org).
+	http://spellchecker.mozdev.org/source.html
+	http://whiteboard.openoffice.org/source/browse/whiteboard/lingucomponent/source/spellcheck/myspell/
+      author: Kevin Hendricks <kevin.hendricks@sympatico.ca>
+8   Make "en-rare" spell file?  Ask Charles Campbell.
+8   The English dictionaries for different regions are not consistent in their
+    use of words with a dash.
+8   Alternate Dutch word list at www.nederlandsewoorden.nl (use script to
+    obtain).  But new Myspell wordlist will come (Hagen)
+7   Insert mode completion mechanism that uses the spell word lists.
+8   Add hl groups to 'spelllang'?
+	:set spelllang=en_us,en-rare/SpellRare,en-math/SpellMath
+    More complicated: Regions with different languages?  E.g., comments
+    in English, strings in German (po file).
+8   Implement compound words when it works for Myspell.  Current idea has the
+    problem that "foo/X" always allows "foofoo", there is no way to specify a
+    word can only be at the start or end, or that only certain words combine.
 
 
 Diff mode:
@@ -1625,7 +1599,6 @@ Built-in script language:
     Alternative: Support packages.  {package-name}:{function-name}().
     Packages are loaded automatically when first used, from
     $VIMRUNTIME/packages (or use a search path).
-7   Make globpath() also work with "**" and upwards search. (Brian Medley)
 7   Add the markclear() function to delete a mark in another buffer.  Charles
     Campbell (2004 Jan 9)
     http://mysite.verizon.net/astronaut/vim/index.html#Patch
@@ -1642,8 +1615,6 @@ Built-in script language:
        .vim file.  Problem: distribution.
     3. Use a cache directory for each user.  How to recognize which cached
        file belongs to a sourced script?
-7   Add "n" flag to search() function, just like searchpair(). (Alexey
-    Marinichev)
 7   Add argument to winwidth() to subtract the space taken by 'foldcolumn',
     signs and/or 'number'.
 8   Add functions:
@@ -1665,7 +1636,6 @@ Built-in script language:
 	mapname({idx}, mode)	return the name of the idx'th mapping.
 				Patch by Ilya Sher, 2004 Mar 4.
 				Return a list instead.
-	printf(format, arg, ..) How to prevent a crash???
 	char2hex()		convert char string to hex string.
 	attributes()		return file protection flags "drwxrwxrwx"
 	filecopy(from, to)	Copy a file
@@ -1675,9 +1645,7 @@ Built-in script language:
 	inputrl()		like input() but right-to-left
 	virtualmode()		add argument to obtain whether "$" was used in
 				Visual block mode.
-	tagtype(tag)		get type of tag (also checks if it exists)
 	getacp()		Win32: get codepage (Glenn Maynard)
-	getbufline()		get line from any buffer
 	deletebufline()		delete line in any buffer
 	appendbufline()		append line in any buffer
 	libcall()		Allow more than one argument.
@@ -1847,8 +1815,6 @@ Messages:
     lines that aren't executed?  Perhaps move the echoing to do_cmdline()?
 8   Use 'report' for ":bdel"?  (Krishna)  To avoid these messages when using a
     script.
-8   "vim --version" output goes to stderr, should be stdout.  Can all output
-    from messages using printf() go to stdout?
 -   Delete message after new command has been entered and have waited for key.
     Perhaps after ten seconds?
 -   Make message history available in "msg" variables: msg1, msg2, .. msg9.
@@ -1949,8 +1915,6 @@ Shared libraries:
 
 
 Tags:
-8   Add a command to jump to a certain kind of tag.  Allow the user to specify
-    values for the optional fields.  E.g., ":tag size type=m".
 8   Add a function that returns the line in the tags file for a matching tag.
     Can be used to extract more info (class name, inheritance, etc.) (Rico
     Hendriks)
@@ -2111,12 +2075,6 @@ GUI:
 7   Support "-visual <type>" command line argument.
 
 
-VMS:
--   Improvement: rewrite term/TTY handling.
--   Improvement: create VMS GTK runtime libraries on OpenVMS 7.1-2 (today GTK
-    works just on 7.3).
-
-
 Autocommands:
 7   For autocommand events that trigger multiple times per buffer (e.g.,
     CursorHold), go through the list once and cache the result for a specific
@@ -2366,6 +2324,14 @@ Insert mode:
 
 
 'cindent', 'smartindent':
+8   Wrong indent below ? : with ():
+	if ((a ? (b) : c) != 0)
+		       aligns with ":".
+8   Using "+" part of 'cinoptions' where it's not expected (Alexei Alexandrov):
+	if (a)
+	{
+	} else
+			asdf;
 8   Wrong indent for ":" after a method with line break in arguments:
 	Foo::Foo (int one,
 		    int two)
@@ -2710,6 +2676,8 @@ Searching:
     Here $paren is evaluated when it's encountered.  This is like a regexp
     inside a regexp.  In the above terms it would be:
 	    \@((\([^()]\|\@g\)*)\)
+7   Support for approximate-regexps to find similar words (agrep
+    http://www.tgries.de/agrep/ tre: http://laurikari.net/tre/index.html).
 8   Add an item for a big character range, so that one can search for a
     chinese character: \z[234-1234]  or \z[XX-YY] or \z[0x23-0x234].
 7   Add an item stack to allow matching ().  One side is "push X on
@@ -2945,18 +2913,16 @@ Options:
 8   Make ":mksession" store buffer-specific options for the specific buffer.
 8   With ":mksession" always store the 'sessionoptions' option, even when
     "options" isn't in it. (St-Amant)
+7   ":with option=value | command": temporarily set an option value and
+    restore it after the command has executed.
 7   Setting an option always sets "w_set_curswant", while this is only
     required for a few options.  Only do it for those options to avoid the
     side effect.
 8   When using ":mksession", also store a command to reset all options to
     their default value, before setting the options that are not at their
     default value.
-8   Should ":mksession" restore the current directory when writing the
-    session, or the directory where the session file is?  Probably need a word
-    in 'sessionoptions' to make a choice:
-    "curdir" (cd to current directory when session file was generated)
-    "sessiondir" (cd to directory of session file)
-    "nodir" (don't cd at all)
+7   With ":mksession" also store the tag stack and jump history. (Michal
+    Malecki)
 8   Make "old" number options that really give a number of effects into string
     options that are a comma separated list.  The old number values should
     also be supported.
@@ -3080,6 +3046,8 @@ Writing files:
 
 
 Substitute:
+8   Substitute with hex/unicode number "\%xff" and "\%uabcd".  Just like
+    "\%uabcd" in search pattern.
 8   Make it easier to replace in all files in the argument list.  E.g.:
     ":argsub/oldword/newword/".  Works like ":argdo %s/oldword/newword/g|w".
 -   :s///p prints the line after a substitution.
@@ -3161,6 +3129,10 @@ Debug mode:
 
 
 Various improvements:
+7   [t to move to previous xml/html tag (like "vatov"), ]t to move to next
+    ("vatv").
+7   [< to move to previous xml/html tag, e.g., previous <li>. ]< to move to
+    next <li>, ]< to next </li>, [< to previous </li>.
 8   Add ":rename" command: rename the file of the current buffer and rename
     the buffer.  Buffer may be modified.
 -   Perhaps ":cexpr" could read errors from a list?
@@ -3206,7 +3178,6 @@ Various improvements:
 9   Support ACLs on more systems.
 7   Add ModeMsgVisual, ModeMsgInsert, etc. so that each mode message can be
     highlighted differently.
-8   Allow using "**" as a wildcard in commands like ":next" and ":args".
 7   Add a message area for the user.  Set some option to reserve space (above
     the command line?).  Use an ":echouser" command to display the message
     (truncated to fit in the space).
@@ -3230,13 +3201,6 @@ Various improvements:
 6   Add ":timer" command, to set a command to be executed at a certain
     interval, or once after some time has elapsed. (Aaron)
 8   Add ":confirm" handling in open_exfile(), for when file already exists.
-8   Use confirm/dialog stuff to ask the user, when a file has changed outside
-    of Vim, if he wants to reload it.  Triggered when focus gained, after
-    shell command, when entering another buffer, etc..
-    Also do this when editing a new file, and another application creates
-    the file before doing ":w" in Vim.
-    Also check if the file protection has changed.  When checking a file into
-    RCS it is made read-only, when checking out it is made read-write.
 8   When quitting with changed files, make the dialog list the changed file
     and allow "write all", "discard all", "write some".  The last one would
     then ask "write" or "discard" for each changed file.  Patch in HierAssist

runtime/doc/usr_11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_11.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 01
+*usr_11.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jun 09
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ messages (with different file names, of course):
 
 	Using swap file ".help.txt.swp" ~
 	Original file "~/vim/runtime/doc/help.txt" ~
-	Recovery completed.  You should check if everything is OK. ~
+	Recovery completed. You should check if everything is OK. ~
 	(You might want to write out this file under another name ~
 	and run diff with the original file to check for changes) ~
 	Delete the .swp file afterwards. ~

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 May 18
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jun 09
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -612,13 +612,13 @@ List manipulation:
 	join()			join List items into a String
 	string()		String representation of a List
 	call()			call a function with List as arguments
-	index()			index of a value in a list
+	index()			index of a value in a List
 	max()			maximum value in a List
 	min()			minimum value in a List
 	count()			count number of times a value appears in a List
 
 Dictionary manipulation:
-	get()			get an entries without error for wrong key
+	get()			get an entry without an error for a wrong key
 	len()			number of entries in a Dictionary
 	has_key()		check whether a key appears in a Dictionary
 	empty()			check if Dictionary is empty
@@ -692,6 +692,7 @@ Buffers, windows and the argument list:
 	winnr()			get the window number for the current window
 	bufwinnr()		get the window number of a specific buffer
 	winbufnr()		get the buffer number of a specific window
+	getbufline()		get a list of lines from the specified buffer
 	getbufvar()		get a variable value from a specific buffer
 	setbufvar()		set a variable in a specific buffer
 	getwinvar()		get a variable value from a specific window
@@ -1117,7 +1118,7 @@ over them: >
 	one ~
 	two ~
 
-The will notice the items are not ordered.  You can sort the list to get a
+The will notice the keys are not ordered.  You can sort the list to get a
 specific order: >
 
 	:for key in sort(keys(uk2nl))
@@ -2237,8 +2238,8 @@ That script must define the "mylib#myfunction()" function.
 
 You can put many other functions in the mylib.vim script, you are free to
 organize your functions in library scripts.  But you must use function names
-where the part before the colon matches the script name.  Otherwise Vim
-would not know what script to load.
+where the part before the '#' matches the script name.  Otherwise Vim would
+not know what script to load.
 
 If you get really enthousiastic and write lots of library scripts, you may
 want to use subdirectories.  Example: >
@@ -2256,7 +2257,7 @@ Where the function is defined like this: >
 	endfunction
 
 Notice that the name the function is defined with is exactly the same as the
-name used for calling the function.  And the part before the last colon
+name used for calling the function.  And the part before the last '#'
 exactly matches the subdirectory and script name.
 
 You can use the same mechanism for variables: >

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Apr 01
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jun 22
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -14,7 +14,8 @@ Various commands					*various*
 1. Various commands					*various-cmds*
 
 							*CTRL-L*
-CTRL-L			Clear and redraw the screen (later).
+CTRL-L			Clear and redraw the screen.  The redraw may happen
+			later, after processing typeahead.
 
 							*:redr* *:redraw*
 :redr[aw][!]		Redraw the screen right now.  When ! is included it is
@@ -288,7 +289,6 @@ N  *+folding*		|folding|
 N  *+gettext*		message translations |multi-lang|
    *+GUI_Athena*	Unix only: Athena |GUI|
    *+GUI_neXtaw*	Unix only: neXtaw |GUI|
-   *+GUI_BeOS*		BeOS only: BeOS |GUI|
    *+GUI_GTK*		Unix only: GTK+ |GUI|
    *+GUI_Motif*		Unix only: Motif |GUI|
    *+GUI_Photon*	QNX only:  Photon |GUI|
@@ -392,20 +392,27 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 			To stop the messages and commands from being echoed to
 			the screen, put the commands in a function and call it
 			with ":silent call Function()".
+			An alternative is to use the 'verbosefile' option,
+			this can be used in combination with ":redir".
 			{not in Vi}
 
 :redi[r] >> {file}	Redirect messages to file {file}.  Append if {file}
 			already exists.  {not in Vi}
 
-:redi[r] @{a-zA-Z}	Redirect messages to register {a-z}.  Append to the
+:redi[r] @{a-zA-Z}>	Redirect messages to register {a-z}.  Append to the
 			contents of the register if its name is given
-			uppercase {A-Z}.  {not in Vi}
+			uppercase {A-Z}.  For backward compatibility, the ">"
+			after the register name can be omitted. {not in Vi}
 :redi[r] @{a-z}>>	Append messages to register {a-z}. {not in Vi}
 
-:redi[r] @*		Redirect messages to the clipboard. {not in Vi}
+:redi[r] @*>		Redirect messages to the clipboard. For backward
+			compatibility, the ">" after the register name can be
+			omitted. {not in Vi}
 :redi[r] @*>>		Append messages to the clipboard. {not in Vi}
 
-:redi[r] @"		Redirect messages to the unnamed register. {not in Vi}
+:redi[r] @">		Redirect messages to the unnamed register. For
+			backward compatibility, the ">" after the register
+			name can be omitted. {not in Vi}
 :redi[r] @">>		Append messages to the unnamed register. {not in Vi}
 
 :redi[r] => {var}	Redirect messages to a variable.  If the variable
@@ -475,6 +482,8 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 				:4verbose set verbose | set verbose
 <				  verbose=4 ~
 				  verbose=0 ~
+			For logging verbose messages in a file use the
+			'verbosefile' option.
 
 							*K*
 K			Run a program to lookup the keyword under the

runtime/doc/version7.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 May 19
+*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Aug 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -21,8 +21,11 @@ NEW FEATURES				|new-7|
 Vim script enhancements			|new-vim-script|
 Spell checking				|new-spell|
 KDE support				|new-KDE|
+MzScheme interface			|new-MzScheme|
+Printing multi-byte text		|new-print-multi-byte|
 Translated manual pages			|new-manpage-trans|
 Internal grep				|new-vimgrep|
+Scroll back in messages			|new-scroll-back|
 POSIX compatibility			|new-posix|
 Debugger support			|new-debug-support|
 Various new items			|new-items-7|
@@ -59,6 +62,9 @@ In a |literal-string| a single quote can be doubled to get one.
 ":echo 'a''b'" would result in "a b", but now that two quotes stand for one it
 results in "a'b".
 
+When overwriting a file with ":w! fname" there was no warning for when "fname"
+was being edited by another Vim.  Vim now gives an error message |E768|.
+
 
 Minor incompatibilities:
 
@@ -76,8 +82,9 @@ When ":file xxx" is used in a buffer without a name, the alternate file name
 isn't set.  This avoids creating buffers without a name that are not useful.
 
 The "2html.vim" script now converts closed folds to HTML.  This means the HTML
-looks like its displayed, with the same folds open and closed.  Use "zR" if no
-folds should appear in the HTML. (partly by Carl Osterwisch)
+looks like its displayed, with the same folds open and closed.  Use "zR", or
+"let html_ignore_folding=1", if no folds should appear in the HTML. (partly by
+Carl Osterwisch)
 Diff mode now is also converted as it is displayed.
 
 Win32: The effect of the <F10> key depended on 'winaltkeys'.  Now it depends
@@ -108,6 +115,9 @@ translated to <Home>, both for the keys and for mappings.  Also for <xEnd>,
 
 ":put" now leaves the cursor on the last inserted line.
 
+When a .gvimrc file exists then 'compatible' is off, just like when a ".vimrc"
+file exists.
+
 ==============================================================================
 NEW FEATURES						*new-7*
 
@@ -141,6 +151,13 @@ with scripts, but they were slow and/or required an external program.
 
 The 'spell' option is used to switch spell checking on or off.
 The 'spelllang' option is used to specify the languages that are accepted.
+The 'spellfile' option specifies where new words are added.
+The 'spellsuggest' option specifies the methods used for making suggestions
+
+The |[s| and |]s| commands can be used to move to the next or previous error.
+The |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to add good and wrong words.
+The |z?| command can be used to correct the word.
+The |:mkspell| command is used to generate a Vim spell file from word lists.
 
 The "undercurl" highlighting attribute was added to nicely point out spelling
 mistakes in the GUI (based on patch from Marcin Dalecki).
@@ -148,7 +165,8 @@ The "guisp" color can be used to give it a color different from foreground and
 background.
 The number of possible different highlight attributes was raised from about
 220 to over 30000.  This allows for the attributes of spelling to be combined
-with syntax highlighting attributes.
+with syntax highlighting attributes.  This is also used for syntax
+highlighting.
 
 Much more info here: |spell|.
 
@@ -191,6 +209,9 @@ The Unix Makefile installs the Italian manual pages in .../man/it/man1/,
 standard for what encoding goes in the "it" directory, the 8-bit encoded file
 is used there as a best guess.
 Other languages are installed in similar places.
+The translated pages are not automatically installed when Vim was configured
+with "--disable-nls", but "make install-languages install-tool-languages" will
+do it anyway.
 
 
 Internal grep						*new-vimgrep*
@@ -205,6 +226,24 @@ patterns, this also allows grepping in compressed and remote files.
 If you want to use the search results in a script you can use the
 |getqflist()| function.
 
+To search in files in various directories the "**" pattern can be used.  It
+expands into an arbitrary depth of directories.  "**" can be used in all
+places where file names are expanded, thus also with |:next| and |:args|.
+
+
+Scroll back in messages					*new-scroll-back*
+-----------------------
+
+When displaying messages, at the |more-prompt| and the |hit-enter-prompt|, The
+'k', 'u' and 'b' keys can be used to scroll back to previous messages.  This
+is especially useful for commands such as ":syntax", ":autocommand" and
+":highlight".  This is implemented in a generic way thus it works for all
+commands and highlighting is kept.  Only works when the 'more' option is set.
+Previously it only partly worked for ":clist".
+
+The |g<| command can be used to see the last page of messages after you have
+hit <Enter> at the |hit-enter-prompt|.  Then you can scroll further back.
+
 
 POSIX compatibility					*new-posix*
 -------------------
@@ -248,7 +287,8 @@ Items that were fixed for both Vi and POSIX compatibilty:
 - Autoindent for ":change" is using the first changed line.
 - Editing Ex command lines is not done in cooked mode, because CTRL-D and
   CTRL-T cannot be handled then.
-- In Ex mode, "1,3" prints three lines.
+- In Ex mode, "1,3" prints three lines.  "%" prints all lines.
+- In Ex mode "undo" would undo all changes since Ex mode was started.
 - Implemented the 'prompt' option.
 
 
@@ -271,6 +311,9 @@ i", i' and i'		(Taro Muraoka)
 CTRL-W <Enter>		In the quickfix window: opens a new window to show the
 			location of the error under the cursor.
 
+|at| and |it| text objects select a block of text between HTML or XML tags.
+
+
 Options: ~
 
 'completefunc'		The name of a function used for user-specified Insert
@@ -292,6 +335,10 @@ Options: ~
 			(idea by Hugo Haas)
 'spell'			switch spell checking on/off
 'spelllang'		languages to check spelling for
+'spellsuggest'		methods for spell suggestions
+'synmaxcol'		maximum column to look for syntax items; avoids very
+			slow redrawing when there are very long lines
+'verbosefile'		Log messages in a file.
 
 
 Ex commands: ~
@@ -318,12 +365,22 @@ Win32: The ":winpos" command now also works in the console. (Vipin Aravind)
 |:cbuffer|		Read error lines from a buffer. (partly by Yegappan
 			Lakshmanan)
 
+|:sort|			Sort lines in the buffer without depending on an
+			external command.
+
+|:caddfile|		Add error messages to an existing quickfix list
+			(Yegappan Lakshmanan).
+
+|:cexpr|		Read error messages from a Vim expression (Yegappan
+			Lakshmanan).
+
+
 New functions: ~
 
 |add()|			append an item to a List
 |append()|		append List of lines to the buffer
-|browsedir()|		Dialog to select a directory.
-|byteidx()| 		Index of a character. (Ilya Sher)
+|browsedir()|		dialog to select a directory
+|byteidx()| 		index of a character (Ilya Sher)
 |call()|		call a function with List as arguments
 |copy()|		make a shallow copy of a List or Dictionary
 |count()|		count nr of times a value is in a List or Dictionary
@@ -333,15 +390,17 @@ New functions: ~
 |extend()|		append one List to another or add items from one
 			Dictionary to another
 |filter()|		remove selected items from a List or Dictionary
-|finddir()|		Find a directory in 'path'.
-|findfile()|		Find a file in 'path'. (Johannes Zellner)
-|foldtextresult()|  	The text displayed for a closed fold at line "lnum".
+|finddir()|		find a directory in 'path'
+|findfile()|		find a file in 'path' (Johannes Zellner)
+|foldtextresult()|  	the text displayed for a closed fold at line "lnum"
 |function()|		make a Funcref out of a function name
 |get()|			get an item from a List or Dictionary
-|getfontname()| 	Get actual font name being used.
-|getfperm()|		Get file permission string. (Nikolai Weibull)
-|getftype()|		Get type of file. (Nikolai Weibull)
-|getline()|		With second argument: get List with buffer lines
+|getbufline()|		get a list of lines from a specified buffer
+			(Yegappan Lakshmanan)
+|getfontname()| 	get actual font name being used
+|getfperm()|		get file permission string (Nikolai Weibull)
+|getftype()|		get type of file (Nikolai Weibull)
+|getline()|		with second argument: get List with buffer lines
 |has_key()|		check whether a key appears in a Dictionary
 |insert()|		insert an item somewhere in a List
 |items()|		get List of Dictionary key-value pairs
@@ -353,17 +412,21 @@ New functions: ~
 |max()|			maximum value in a List or Dictionary
 |min()|			minimum value in a List or Dictionary
 |mkdir()|		create a directory
+|printf()|		format text
 |readfile()|		read a file into a list of lines
 |remove()|		remove one or more items from a List or Dictionary
-|repeat()| 		Repeat "expr" "count" times.  (Christophe Poucet)
+|repeat()| 		repeat "expr" "count" times (Christophe Poucet)
 |reverse()|		reverse the order of a List
 |setqflist()|		create a quickfix list (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
 |sort()|		sort a List
+|soundfold()|		get the sound-a-like equivalent of a word
 |split()|		split a String into a List
-|string()|		String representation of a List or Dictionary
-|system()|		Filters {input} through a shell command.
-|taglist()|		Get list of matching tags. (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
-|tr()|			Translate characters. (Ron Aaron)
+|spellbadword()|	get a badly spelled word
+|spellsuggest()|	get suggestions for correct spelling
+|string()|		string representation of a List or Dictionary
+|system()|		filters {input} through a shell command
+|taglist()|		get list of matching tags (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
+|tr()|			translate characters (Ron Aaron)
 |values()|		get List of Dictionary values
 |writefile()|		write a list of lines into a file
 
@@ -415,6 +478,12 @@ PHP compiler plugin. (Doug Kearns)
 
 Sive syntax file. (Nikolai Weibull)
 
+Pascal indent file. (Neil Carter)
+
+Many filetype plugins and others from Nikolai Weibull.
+
+Xquery syntax file. (Jean-Marc Vanel)
+
 Moved all the indent settings from the filetype plugin to the indent file.
 Implemented b:undo_indent to undo indent settings when setting 'filetype' to a
 different value.
@@ -568,12 +637,18 @@ When a register is empty it is not stored in the viminfo file.
 
 Removed the tcltags script, it's obsolete.
 
-":redir @*>" and ":redir @+>" append to the clipboard.  Better check for
+":redir @*>>" and ":redir @+>>" append to the clipboard.  Better check for
 invalid characters after the register name. |:redir|
 
 ":redir => variable" and ":redir =>> variable" write or append to a variable.
 (Yegappan Lakshmanan) |:redir|
 
+":redir @{a-z}>>" appends to register a to z. (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
+
+The 'verbosefile' option can be used to log messages in a file.  Verbose
+messages are not displayed then.  The "-V{filename}" argument can be used to
+log startup messages.
+
 ":let g:" lists global variables.
 ":let b:" lists buffer-local variables.
 ":let w:" lists window-local variables.
@@ -582,6 +657,12 @@ invalid characters after the register name. |:redir|
 The stridx() and strridx() functions take a third argument, where to start
 searching.  (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
 
+The getreg() function takes an extra argument to be able to get the expression
+for the '=' register instead of the result of evaluating it.
+
+The setline() function can take a List argument to set multiple lines.  When
+the line number is just below the last line the line is appended.
+
 g CTRL-G also shows the number of characters if it differs from the number of
 bytes.
 
@@ -622,6 +703,37 @@ Added the "%s" item to 'errorformat'. (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
 GTK GUI: use the GTK file dialog when it's available.  Mix from patches by
 Grahame Bowland and Evan Webb.
 
+Added ":scriptnames" to bugreport.vim, so that we can see what plugins were
+used.
+
+Win32: If the user changes the setting for the number of lines a scroll wheel
+click scrolls it is now used immediately.  Previously Vim would need to be
+restarted.
+
+When using @= in an expression the value is expression @= contains.  ":let @=
+= value" can be used to set the register contents.
+
+A ! can be added to ":popup" to have the popup menu appear at the mouse
+pointer position instead of the text cursor.
+
+The table with encodings has been expanded with many MS-Windows codepages,
+such as cp1250 and cp737, so that these can also be used on Unix without
+prepending "8bit-".
+
+Added the "customlist" completion argument to a user-defined command.  The
+user-defined completion function should return the completion candidates as a
+Vim List and the returned results are not filtered by Vim. (Yegappan
+Lakshmanan)
+
+Win32: Balloons can have multiple lines if common controls supports it.
+(Sergey Khorev)
+
+The 's' flag is added to the search() and searchpair() function to set the
+' mark if the cursor is moved. (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
+
+When 'verbose' is set the output of ":highlight" will show where a highlight
+item was last set.
+
 ==============================================================================
 COMPILE TIME CHANGES					*compile-changes-7*
 
@@ -639,6 +751,20 @@ file.
 When running the tests and one of them fails to produce "test.out" the
 following tests are still executed.  This helps when running out of memory.
 
+When compiling with EXITFREE defined and the ccmalloc library it is possible
+to detect memory leaks.  Some memory will always reported as leaked, such as
+allocated by X11 library functions and the memory allocated in alloc_cmdbuff()
+to store the ":quit" command.
+
+Moved the code for printing to src/hardcopy.c.
+
+Moved some code from main() to separate functions to make it easier to see
+what is being done.  Use a structure to avoid a lot of arguments to the
+functions.
+
+Moved unix_expandpath() to misc1.c, so that it can also be used by os_mac.c
+without copying the code.
+
 ==============================================================================
 BUG FIXES						*bug-fixes-7*
 
@@ -1047,6 +1173,7 @@ reallocating the buffer every time. (Alexei Alexandrov)
 
 When using a Python "atexit" function it was not invoked when Vim exits.  Now
 call Py_Finalize() for that. (Ugo Di Girolamo)
+This breaks the thread stuff though, fixed by Ugo.
 
 GTK GUI: using a .vimrc with "set cmdheight=2 lines=43" and ":split" right
 after startup, the window layout is messed up. (Michael Schaap)  Added
@@ -1072,4 +1199,55 @@ Use of sprintf() sometimes didn't check properly for buffer overflow.  Also
 when using smsg().  Included code for snprintf() to avoid having to do size
 checks where invoking them
 
+":help \=<Tab>" didn't find "sub-replace-\=".  Wild menu for help tags didn't
+show backslashes.  ":he :s\=" didn't work.
+
+When reading an errorfile "~/" in a file name was not expanded.
+
+GTK GUI: When adding a scrollbar (e.g. when using ":vsplit") in a script or
+removing it the window size may change.  GTK sends us resize events when we
+change the window size ourselves, but they may come at an unexpected moment.
+Peek for a character to get any window resize events and fix 'columns' and
+'lines' to undo this.
+
+After deleting files from the argument list a session file generated with
+":mksession" may contain invalid ":next" commands.
+
+When 'shortmess' is empty and 'keymap' set to accents, in Insert mode CTRL-N
+may cause the hit-enter prompt.  Typing 'a then didn't result in the accented
+character.  Put the character typed at the prompt back in the typeahead buffer
+so that mapping is done in the right mode.
+
+setbufvar() and setwinvar() did not give error messages.
+
+It was possible to set a variable with an illegal name, e.g. with setbufvar().
+It was possible to define a function with illegal name, e.t. ":func F{-1}()"
+
+CTRL-W F and "gf" didn't use the same method to get the file name.
+
+When reporting a conversion error the line number of the last error could be
+given.  Now report the first encountered error.
+
+When using ":e ++enc=name file" and iconv() was used for conversion an error
+caused a fallback to no conversion.  Now replace a character with '?' and
+continue.
+
+When opening a new buffer the local value of 'bomb' was not initialized from
+the global value.
+
+Win32: When using the "Edit with Vim" entry the file name was limited to about
+200 characters.
+
+When using command line completion for ":e *foo" and the file "+foo" exists
+the resulting command ":e +foo" doesn't work.  Now insert a backslash: ":e
+\+foo".
+
+When the translation of "-- More --" was not 10 characters long the following
+message would be in the wrong position.
+
+At the more-prompt the last character in the last line wasn't drawn.
+
+When deleting non-existing text while 'virtualedit' is set the '[ and '] marks
+were not set.
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/vimdiff.1

@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ changes in a fold.  'foldcolumn' is set to two to make it easy to spot the
 folds and open or close them.
 .SH OPTIONS
 Vertical splits are used to align the lines, as if the "\-O" argument was used.
-To use horizontal splits intead, use the "\-o" argument.
+To use horizontal splits instead, use the "\-o" argument.
 .PP
 For all other arguments see vim(1).
 .SH SEE ALSO

runtime/doc/vimdiff.man

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ DESCRIPTION
 
 OPTIONS
        Vertical  splits  are  used to align the lines, as if the "-O" argument
-       was used.  To use horizontal splits intead, use the "-o" argument.
+       was used.  To use horizontal splits instead, use the "-o" argument.
 
        For all other arguments see vim(1).
 

runtime/filetype.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim support file to detect file types
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2005 May 18
+" Last Change:	2005 Jul 13
 
 " Listen very carefully, I will say this only once
 if exists("did_load_filetypes")
@@ -71,6 +71,9 @@ endfun
 " A-A-P recipe
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.aap			setf aap
 
+" A2ps printing utility
+au BufNewFile,BufRead etc/a2ps.cfg,etc/a2ps/*.cfg,a2psrc,.a2psrc setf a2ps
+
 " ABAB/4
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.abap			setf abap
 
@@ -194,6 +197,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.atl,*.as		setf atlas
 " Automake
 au BufNewFile,BufRead [mM]akefile.am		setf automake
 
+" Autotest .at files are actually m4
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.at			setf m4
+
 " Avenue
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ave			setf ave
 
@@ -448,6 +454,12 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.d			setf d
 " Desktop files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.desktop,.directory	setf desktop
 
+" Dict config
+au BufNewFile,BufRead dict.conf,.dictrc		setf dictconf
+
+" Dictd config
+au BufNewFile,BufRead dictd.conf		setf dictdconf
+
 " Diff files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.diff,*.rej,*.patch	setf diff
 
@@ -528,6 +540,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *esmtprc			setf esmtprc
 " ESQL-C
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ec,*.EC			setf esqlc
 
+" Esterel
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.strl			setf esterel
+
 " Essbase script
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.csc			setf csc
 
@@ -540,6 +555,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.exp			setf expect
 " Exports
 au BufNewFile,BufRead exports			setf exports
 
+" Factor
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.factor			setf factor
+
 " Fetchmail RC file
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .fetchmailrc		setf fetchmail
 
@@ -591,6 +609,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.groovy			setf groovy
 " GNU Server Pages
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.gsp			setf gsp
 
+" Group file
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/group		setf group
+
 " GTK RC
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .gtkrc,gtkrc		setf gtkrc
 
@@ -663,6 +684,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead */.icewm/menu		setf icemenu
 " IDL (Interactive Data Language)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pro			setf idlang
 
+" Indent RC
+au BufNewFile,BufRead indentrc			setf indentrc
+
 " Inform
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .indent.pro		setf indent
 
@@ -727,18 +751,27 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ace,*.ACE		setf lace
 " Latte
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.latte,*.lte		setf latte
 
+" Limits
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/limits		setf limits
+
 " LambdaProlog (*.mod too, see Modsim)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sig			setf lprolog
 
 " LDAP LDIF
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ldif			setf ldif
 
+" Ld loader
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ld			setf ld
+
 " Lex
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.lex,*.l			setf lex
 
 " Libao
 au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/libao.conf,*/.libao	setf libao
 
+" Libsensors
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/sensors.conf		setf sensors
+
 " LFTP
 au BufNewFile,BufRead lftp.conf,.lftprc,*lftp/rc	setf lftp
 
@@ -755,9 +788,18 @@ else
   au BufNewFile,BufRead *.lsp,*.lisp,*.el,*.cl,*.jl,.emacs,.sawfishrc setf lisp
 endif
 
+" SBCL implementation of Common Lisp
+au BufNewFile,BufRead sbclrc,.sbclrc		setf lisp
+
 " Lite
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.lite,*.lt		setf lite
 
+" Login access
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/login.access		setf loginaccess
+
+" Login defs
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/login.defs		setf logindefs
+
 " Logtalk
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.lgt			setf logtalk
 
@@ -795,6 +837,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ist,*.mst		setf ist
 " Manpage
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.man			setf man
 
+" Man config
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/man.conf		setf manconf
+
 " Maple V
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mv,*.mpl,*.mws		setf maple
 
@@ -911,6 +956,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mush			setf mush
 au BufNewFile,BufRead Muttrc			setf muttrc
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .muttrc*,*/.mutt/muttrc*	call s:StarSetf('muttrc')
 
+" Nano
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/nanorc,.nanorc	setf nanorc
+
 " Nastran input/DMAP
 "au BufNewFile,BufRead *.dat			setf nastran
 
@@ -984,9 +1032,15 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ora			setf ora
 " Packet filter conf
 au BufNewFile,BufRead pf.conf			setf pf
 
+" Pam conf
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/pam.conf		setf pamconf
+
 " PApp
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.papp,*.pxml,*.pxsl	setf papp
 
+" Password file
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/passwd,/etc/shadow,/etc/shadow- setf passwd
+
 " Pascal (also *.p)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pas			setf pascal
 
@@ -1198,6 +1252,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead INDEX,INFO
 " Prolog
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pdb			setf prolog
 
+" Protocols
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/protocols		setf protocols
+
 " Pyrex
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pyx,*.pxd		setf pyrex
 
@@ -1317,6 +1374,21 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead sendmail.cf		setf sm
 " Sendmail .mc files are actually m4
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mc			setf m4
 
+" Services
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/services		setf services
+
+" Service Location config
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/slp.conf		setf slpconf
+
+" Service Location registration
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/slp.reg		setf slpreg
+
+" Service Location SPI
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/slp.spi		setf slpspi
+
+" Setserial config
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/serial.conf		setf setserial
+
 " SGML
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sgm,*.sgml
 	\ if getline(1).getline(2).getline(3).getline(4).getline(5) =~? 'linuxdoc' |
@@ -1433,7 +1505,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sim			setf simula
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sin,*.s85		setf sinda
 
 " SKILL
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.il			setf skill
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.il,*.ils,*.cdf		setf skill
 
 " SLRN
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .slrnrc			setf slrnrc
@@ -1529,6 +1601,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.stp			setf stp
 " Standard ML
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sml			setf sml
 
+" Sysctl
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/sysctl.conf		setf sysctl
+
 " Sudoers
 au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/sudoers,sudoers.tmp	setf sudoers
 
@@ -1555,7 +1630,27 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.slt			setf tsalt
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ti			setf terminfo
 
 " TeX
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.tex,*.latex,*.sty,*.dtx,*.ltx,*.bbl	setf tex
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.latex,*.sty,*.dtx,*.ltx,*.bbl	setf tex
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.tex			call s:FTtex()
+
+fun! s:FTtex()
+  let n = 1
+  while n < 10 && n < line("$")
+    let line = getline(n)
+    if line =~ '^\s*\\\%(documentclass\>\|usepackage\>\|begin{\)'
+      setf tex
+      return
+    elseif line =~ '^\s*\\\%(start\l\+\|setup\l\+\|usemodule\)\>'
+      setf context
+      return
+    endif
+    let n = n + 1
+  endwhile
+  setf tex
+endfun
+
+" Context
+au BufNewFile,BufRead tex/context/*/*.tex	setf context
 
 " Texinfo
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.texinfo,*.texi,*.txi	setf texinfo
@@ -1584,15 +1679,30 @@ au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.tsscl		setf tsscl
 " Motif UIT/UIL files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.uit,*.uil		setf uil
 
+" Udev conf
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/udev/udev.conf	setf udevconf
+
+" Udev rules
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/udev/rules.d/*.rules setf udevrules
+
+" Udev permissions
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/udev/permissions.d/*.permissions setf udevperm
+"
+" Udev symlinks config
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/udev/cdsymlinks.conf	setf sh
+
 " UnrealScript
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.uc			setf uc
 
+" Updatedb
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/updatedb.conf	setf updatedb
+
 " Verilog HDL
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.v			setf verilog
 
 " VHDL
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.hdl,*.vhd,*.vhdl,*.vbe,*.vst  setf vhdl
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vhdl_[0-9]*  		call s:StarSetf('vhdl')
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vhdl_[0-9]*		call s:StarSetf('vhdl')
 
 " Vim script
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vim,.exrc,_exrc		setf vim
@@ -1667,6 +1777,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead XF86Config
 " Xorg config
 au BufNewFile,BufRead xorg.conf,xorg.conf-4	let b:xf86c_xfree86_version = 4 | setf xf86conf
 
+" Xinetd conf
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/xinetd.conf		setf xinetd
+
 " XS Perl extension interface language
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xs			setf xs
 
@@ -1696,6 +1809,12 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.csproj,*.csproj.user	setf xml
 " Qt Linguist translation source and Qt User Interface Files are XML
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ts,*.ui			setf xml
 
+" Xdg menus
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/xdg/menus/*.menu	setf xml
+
+" Xquery
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xq,*.xql,*.xqm,*.xquery,*.xqy	setf xquery
+
 " XSD
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xsd			setf xsd
 
@@ -1703,7 +1822,23 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xsd			setf xsd
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xsl,*.xslt		setf xslt
 
 " Yacc
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.y,*.yy			setf yacc
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.yy			setf yacc
+
+" Yacc or racc
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.y			call s:FTy()
+
+fun! s:FTy()
+  let n = 1
+  while n < 10 && n < line("$")
+    if getline(n) =~ '^\s*\(#\|class\>\)'
+      setf racc
+      return
+    endif
+    let n = n + 1
+  endwhile
+  setf yacc
+endfun
+
 
 " Yaml
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.yaml,*.yml		setf yaml
@@ -1779,6 +1914,9 @@ au! BufNewFile,BufRead *jarg*
 " Makefile
 au BufNewFile,BufRead [mM]akefile*		call s:StarSetf('make')
 
+" Modconf
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/modprobe.*		call s:StarSetf('modconf')
+
 " Ruby Makefile
 au BufNewFile,BufRead [rR]akefile*		call s:StarSetf('ruby')
 
@@ -1788,6 +1926,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead muttrc*,Muttrc*		call s:StarSetf('muttrc')
 " Nroff macros
 au BufNewFile,BufRead tmac.*			call s:StarSetf('nroff')
 
+" Pam conf
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/pam.d/*		call s:StarSetf('pamconf')
+
 " Printcap and Termcap
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *printcap*
 	\ if !did_filetype()
@@ -1819,6 +1960,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead XF86Config*
 " X11 xmodmap
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *xmodmap*			call s:StarSetf('xmodmap')
 
+" Xinetd conf
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/xinetd.d/*		call s:StarSetf('xinetd')
+
 " Z-Shell script
 au BufNewFile,BufRead zsh*,zlog*		call s:StarSetf('zsh')
 

runtime/ftplugin/AppendMatchGroup.vim

@@ -1,125 +1,125 @@
-" Vim filetype plugin file utility
-" Language:    * (various)
-" Maintainer:  Dave Silvia <dsilvia@mchsi.com>
-" Date:        6/30/2004
-
-" The start of match (b:SOM) default is:
-"       '\<'
-" The end of match (b:EOM) default is:
-"       '\>'
-"
-" If you want to use some other start/end of match, just assign the
-" value to the b:SOM|EOM variable in your filetype script.
-"
-" SEE: :h pattern.txt
-"      :h pattern-searches
-"      :h regular-expression
-"      :h matchit
-
-let s:myName=expand("<sfile>:t")
-
-" matchit.vim not loaded -- don't do anyting
-if !exists("loaded_matchit")
-	echomsg s:myName.": matchit.vim not loaded -- finishing without loading"
-	finish
-endif
-
-" already been here -- don't redefine
-if exists("*AppendMatchGroup")
-	finish
-endif
-
-" Function To Build b:match_words
-" The following function, 'AppendMatchGroup', helps to increase
-" readability of your filetype script if you choose to use matchit.
-" It also precludes many construction errors, reducing the
-" construction to simply invoking the function with the match words.
-" As an example, let's take the ubiquitous if/then/else/endif type
-" of construct.  This is how the entry in your filetype script would look.
-"
-"     " source the AppendMatchGroup function file
-"     runtime ftplugin/AppendMatchGroup.vim
-"
-"     " fill b:match_words
-"     call AppendMatchGroup('if,then,else,endif')
-"
-" And the b:match_words constructed would look like:
-"
-"     \<if\>:\<then\>:\<else\>:\<endif\>
-" 
-" Use of AppendMatchGroup makes your filetype script is a little
-" less busy and a lot more readable.  Additionally, it
-" checks three critical things:
-"
-"      1)  Do you have at least 2 entries in your match group.
-"
-"      2)  Does the buffer variable 'b:match_words' exist?  if not, create it.
-"
-"      3)  If the buffer variable 'b:match_words' does exist, is the last
-"          character a ','?  If not, add it before appending.
-" 
-" You should now be able to match 'if/then/else/endif' in succession
-" in your source file, in just about any construction you may have
-" chosen for them.
-"
-" To add another group, simply call 'AppendMatchGroup again.  E.G.:
-"
-"      call AppendMatchGroup('while,do,endwhile')
-
-function AppendMatchGroup(mwordList)
-	let List=a:mwordList
-	let Comma=match(List,',')
-	if Comma == -1 || Comma == strlen(List)-1
-		echoerr "Must supply a comma separated list of at least 2 entries."
-		echoerr "Supplied list: <".List.">"
-		return
-	endif
-	let listEntryBegin=0
-	let listEntryEnd=Comma
-	let listEntry=strpart(List,listEntryBegin,listEntryEnd-listEntryBegin)
-	let List=strpart(List,Comma+1)
-	let Comma=match(List,',')
-	" if listEntry is all spaces || List is empty || List is all spaces
-	if (match(listEntry,'\s\+') == 0 && match(listEntry,'\S\+') == -1)
-			\ || List == '' || (match(List,'\s\+') == 0 && match(List,'\S\+') == -1)
-		echoerr "Can't use all spaces for an entry <".listEntry.">"
-		echoerr "Remaining supplied list: <".List.">"
-		return
-	endif
-
-	if !exists("b:SOM")
-		let b:SOM='\<'
-	endif
-	if !exists("b:EOM")
-		let b:EOM='\>'
-	endif
-	if !exists("b:match_words")
-		let b:match_words=''
-	endif
-	if b:match_words != '' && match(b:match_words,',$') == -1
-		let b:match_words=b:match_words.','
-	endif
-	" okay, all set add first entry in this list
-	let b:match_words=b:match_words.b:SOM.listEntry.b:EOM.':'
-	while Comma != -1
-		let listEntryEnd=Comma
-		let listEntry=strpart(List,listEntryBegin,listEntryEnd-listEntryBegin)
-		let List=strpart(List,Comma+1)
-		let Comma=match(List,',')
-		" if listEntry is all spaces
-		if match(listEntry,'\s\+') == 0 && match(listEntry,'\S\+') == -1
-			echoerr "Can't use all spaces for an entry <".listEntry."> - skipping"
-			echoerr "Remaining supplied list: <".List.">"
-			continue
-		endif
-		let b:match_words=b:match_words.b:SOM.listEntry.b:EOM.':'
-	endwhile
-	let listEntry=List
-	let b:match_words=b:match_words.b:SOM.listEntry.b:EOM
-endfunction
-
-" TODO:  Write a wrapper to handle multiple groups in one function call.
-"        Don't see a lot of utility in this as it would undoubtedly warrant
-"        continuation lines in the filetype script and it would be a toss
-"        up as to which is more readable: individual calls one to a line or
-"        a single call with continuation lines.  I vote for the former.
+" Vim filetype plugin file utility
+" Language:    * (various)
+" Maintainer:  Dave Silvia <dsilvia@mchsi.com>
+" Date:        6/30/2004
+
+" The start of match (b:SOM) default is:
+"       '\<'
+" The end of match (b:EOM) default is:
+"       '\>'
+"
+" If you want to use some other start/end of match, just assign the
+" value to the b:SOM|EOM variable in your filetype script.
+"
+" SEE: :h pattern.txt
+"      :h pattern-searches
+"      :h regular-expression
+"      :h matchit
+
+let s:myName=expand("<sfile>:t")
+
+" matchit.vim not loaded -- don't do anyting
+if !exists("loaded_matchit")
+	echomsg s:myName.": matchit.vim not loaded -- finishing without loading"
+	finish
+endif
+
+" already been here -- don't redefine
+if exists("*AppendMatchGroup")
+	finish
+endif
+
+" Function To Build b:match_words
+" The following function, 'AppendMatchGroup', helps to increase
+" readability of your filetype script if you choose to use matchit.
+" It also precludes many construction errors, reducing the
+" construction to simply invoking the function with the match words.
+" As an example, let's take the ubiquitous if/then/else/endif type
+" of construct.  This is how the entry in your filetype script would look.
+"
+"     " source the AppendMatchGroup function file
+"     runtime ftplugin/AppendMatchGroup.vim
+"
+"     " fill b:match_words
+"     call AppendMatchGroup('if,then,else,endif')
+"
+" And the b:match_words constructed would look like:
+"
+"     \<if\>:\<then\>:\<else\>:\<endif\>
+" 
+" Use of AppendMatchGroup makes your filetype script is a little
+" less busy and a lot more readable.  Additionally, it
+" checks three critical things:
+"
+"      1)  Do you have at least 2 entries in your match group.
+"
+"      2)  Does the buffer variable 'b:match_words' exist?  if not, create it.
+"
+"      3)  If the buffer variable 'b:match_words' does exist, is the last
+"          character a ','?  If not, add it before appending.
+" 
+" You should now be able to match 'if/then/else/endif' in succession
+" in your source file, in just about any construction you may have
+" chosen for them.
+"
+" To add another group, simply call 'AppendMatchGroup again.  E.G.:
+"
+"      call AppendMatchGroup('while,do,endwhile')
+
+function AppendMatchGroup(mwordList)
+	let List=a:mwordList
+	let Comma=match(List,',')
+	if Comma == -1 || Comma == strlen(List)-1
+		echoerr "Must supply a comma separated list of at least 2 entries."
+		echoerr "Supplied list: <".List.">"
+		return
+	endif
+	let listEntryBegin=0
+	let listEntryEnd=Comma
+	let listEntry=strpart(List,listEntryBegin,listEntryEnd-listEntryBegin)
+	let List=strpart(List,Comma+1)
+	let Comma=match(List,',')
+	" if listEntry is all spaces || List is empty || List is all spaces
+	if (match(listEntry,'\s\+') == 0 && match(listEntry,'\S\+') == -1)
+			\ || List == '' || (match(List,'\s\+') == 0 && match(List,'\S\+') == -1)
+		echoerr "Can't use all spaces for an entry <".listEntry.">"
+		echoerr "Remaining supplied list: <".List.">"
+		return
+	endif
+
+	if !exists("b:SOM")
+		let b:SOM='\<'
+	endif
+	if !exists("b:EOM")
+		let b:EOM='\>'
+	endif
+	if !exists("b:match_words")
+		let b:match_words=''
+	endif
+	if b:match_words != '' && match(b:match_words,',$') == -1
+		let b:match_words=b:match_words.','
+	endif
+	" okay, all set add first entry in this list
+	let b:match_words=b:match_words.b:SOM.listEntry.b:EOM.':'
+	while Comma != -1
+		let listEntryEnd=Comma
+		let listEntry=strpart(List,listEntryBegin,listEntryEnd-listEntryBegin)
+		let List=strpart(List,Comma+1)
+		let Comma=match(List,',')
+		" if listEntry is all spaces
+		if match(listEntry,'\s\+') == 0 && match(listEntry,'\S\+') == -1
+			echoerr "Can't use all spaces for an entry <".listEntry."> - skipping"
+			echoerr "Remaining supplied list: <".List.">"
+			continue
+		endif
+		let b:match_words=b:match_words.b:SOM.listEntry.b:EOM.':'
+	endwhile
+	let listEntry=List
+	let b:match_words=b:match_words.b:SOM.listEntry.b:EOM
+endfunction
+
+" TODO:  Write a wrapper to handle multiple groups in one function call.
+"        Don't see a lot of utility in this as it would undoubtedly warrant
+"        continuation lines in the filetype script and it would be a toss
+"        up as to which is more readable: individual calls one to a line or
+"        a single call with continuation lines.  I vote for the former.

runtime/ftplugin/a2ps.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         a2ps(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s include=^\\s*Include:
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/alsaconf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         alsaconf(8) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/arch.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         GNU Arch inventory file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/automake.vim

@@ -1,11 +1,10 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
-" Langugage:	    Automake
-" Maintainer:	    Nikolai Weibull <source@pcppopper.org>
-" URL:		    http://www.pcppopper.org/vim/ftplugin/pcp/automake/
-" Latest Revision:  2004-05-22
-" arch-tag:	    3a78b0cd-27b2-410a-8e7b-51a1717c2a5b
+" Language:         Automake
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-22
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
 
-" Same as makefile filetype plugin for now.
 runtime! ftplugin/make.vim ftplugin/make_*.vim ftplugin/make/*.vim
-
-" vim: set sts=2 sw=2:

runtime/ftplugin/bdf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         BDF font definition
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=b:COMMENT commentstring=COMMENT\ %s
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/c.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2005 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2005 Jun 22
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ endif
 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 
 " Using line continuation here.
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo-=C
 
 let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl fo< com< | if has('vms') | setl isk< | endif"
@@ -48,3 +49,6 @@ if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
 	  \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
   endif
 endif
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/ftplugin/calendar.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         calendar(1) input file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/ commentstring& include&
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/changelog.vim

@@ -1,24 +1,22 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
-" Language:	    generic Changelog file
-" Maintainer:	    Nikolai Weibull <source@pcppopper.org>
-" URL:		    http://www.pcppopper.org/vim/ftplugin/pcp/changelog/
-" Latest Revision:  2004-04-25
-" arch-tag:	    b00e2974-c559-4477-b7b2-3ef3f4061bdb
+" Language:         generic Changelog file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-29
 " Variables:
 "   g:changelog_timeformat -
-"	description: the timeformat used in ChangeLog entries.
-"	default: "%Y-%m-%d".
+"       description: the timeformat used in ChangeLog entries.
+"       default: "%Y-%m-%d".
 "   g:changelog_username -
-"	description: the username to use in ChangeLog entries
-"	default: try to deduce it from environment variables and system	files.
+"       description: the username to use in ChangeLog entries
+"       default: try to deduce it from environment variables and system files.
 " Local Mappings:
 "   <Leader>o -
-"	adds a new changelog entry for the current user for the current date.
+"       adds a new changelog entry for the current user for the current date.
 " Global Mappings:
 "   <Leader>o -
-"	switches to the ChangeLog buffer opened for the current directory, or
-"	opens it in a new buffer if it exists in the current directory.  Then
-"	it does the same as the local <Leader>o described above.
+"       switches to the ChangeLog buffer opened for the current directory, or
+"       opens it in a new buffer if it exists in the current directory.  Then
+"       it does the same as the local <Leader>o described above.
 " Notes:
 "   run 'runtime ftplugin/changelog.vim' to enable the global mapping for
 "   changelog files.
@@ -28,16 +26,13 @@
 
 " If 'filetype' isn't "changelog", we must have been to add ChangeLog opener
 if &filetype == "changelog"
-  " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
   if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
     finish
   endif
-
-  " Don't load another plugin for this buffer
   let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 
-  let cpo_save = &cpo
-  set cpo-=C
+  let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+  set cpo&vim
 
   " The format of the date-time field (should have been called dateformat)
   if !exists("g:changelog_timeformat")
@@ -55,56 +50,56 @@ if &filetype == "changelog"
       " Get the users login name
       let login = system('whoami')
       if v:shell_error
-	let login = 'unknown'
+        let login = 'unknown'
       else
-	let newline = stridx(login, "\n")
-	if newline != -1
-	  let login = strpart(login, 0, newline)
-	endif
+        let newline = stridx(login, "\n")
+        if newline != -1
+          let login = strpart(login, 0, newline)
+        endif
       endif
 
       " Try to full name from gecos field in /etc/passwd
       if filereadable('/etc/passwd')
-	let name = substitute(
-	      \system('cat /etc/passwd | grep ^`whoami`'),
-	      \'^\%([^:]*:\)\{4}\([^:]*\):.*$', '\1', '')
+        let name = substitute(
+              \system('cat /etc/passwd | grep ^`whoami`'),
+              \'^\%([^:]*:\)\{4}\([^:]*\):.*$', '\1', '')
       endif
 
       " If there is no such file, or there was some other problem try
       " others
       if !filereadable('/etc/passwd') || v:shell_error
-	" Maybe the environment has something of interest
-	if exists("$NAME")
-	  let name = $NAME
-	else
-	  " No? well, use the login name and capitalize first
-	  " character
-	  let name = toupper(login[0]) . strpart(login, 1)
-	endif
+        " Maybe the environment has something of interest
+        if exists("$NAME")
+          let name = $NAME
+        else
+          " No? well, use the login name and capitalize first
+          " character
+          let name = toupper(login[0]) . strpart(login, 1)
+        endif
       endif
 
       " Only keep stuff before the first comma
       let comma = stridx(name, ',')
       if comma != -1
-	let name = strpart(name, 0, comma)
+        let name = strpart(name, 0, comma)
       endif
 
       " And substitute & in the real name with the login of our user
       let amp = stridx(name, '&')
       if amp != -1
-	let name = strpart(name, 0, amp) . toupper(login[0]) .
-	      \strpart(login, 1) . strpart(name, amp + 1)
+        let name = strpart(name, 0, amp) . toupper(login[0]) .
+              \strpart(login, 1) . strpart(name, amp + 1)
       endif
 
       " Get our hostname
       let hostname = system("hostname")
       if v:shell_error
-	let hostname = 'unknownhost'
+        let hostname = 'unknownhost'
       else
-	let newline = stridx(hostname, "\n")
-	if newline != -1
-	  let hostname = strpart(hostname, 0, newline)
-	endif
+        let newline = stridx(hostname, "\n")
+        if newline != -1
+          let hostname = strpart(hostname, 0, newline)
+        endif
       endif
 
       " And finally set the username
@@ -134,15 +129,15 @@ if &filetype == "changelog"
     while i != -1
       let char = str[i + 1]
       if char == '%'
-	let middle = '%'
+        let middle = '%'
       elseif char == 'd'
-	let middle = a:date
+        let middle = a:date
       elseif char == 'u'
-	let middle = a:user
+        let middle = a:user
       elseif char == 'c'
-	let middle = '{cursor}'
+        let middle = '{cursor}'
       else
-	let middle = char
+        let middle = char
       endif
       let str = strpart(str, 0, i) . middle . strpart(str, i + 2)
       let i = stridx(str, '%')
@@ -169,17 +164,17 @@ if &filetype == "changelog"
     " Look for an entry for today by our user
     let date = strftime(g:changelog_timeformat)
     let search = s:substitute_items(g:changelog_date_entry_search, date,
-	  \g:changelog_username)
+          \g:changelog_username)
     if search(search) > 0
       " Ok, now we look for the end of the date-entry, and add an entry
       let pos = nextnonblank(line('.') + 1)
       let line = getline(pos)
       while line =~ '^\s\+\S\+'
-	let pos = pos + 1
-	let line = getline(pos)
+        let pos = pos + 1
+        let line = getline(pos)
       endwhile
       let insert = s:substitute_items(g:changelog_new_entry_format,
-	    \'', '')
+            \'', '')
       execute "normal! ".(pos - 1)."Go".insert
       execute pos
     else
@@ -188,18 +183,18 @@ if &filetype == "changelog"
 
       " No entry today, so create a date-user header and insert an entry
       let todays_entry = s:substitute_items(g:changelog_new_date_format,
-	    \date, g:changelog_username)
+            \date, g:changelog_username)
       " Make sure we have a cursor positioning
       if stridx(todays_entry, '{cursor}') == -1
-	let todays_entry = todays_entry.'{cursor}'
+        let todays_entry = todays_entry.'{cursor}'
       endif
 
       " Now do the work
       execute "normal! i".todays_entry
       if remove_empty
-	while getline('$') == ''
-	  $delete
-	endwhile
+        while getline('$') == ''
+          $delete
+        endwhile
       endif
 
       1
@@ -216,7 +211,7 @@ if &filetype == "changelog"
     command! -nargs=0 NewChangelogEntry call s:new_changelog_entry()
   endif
 
-  let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< tw< fo< et<"
+  let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< tw< fo< et< ai<"
 
   if &textwidth == 0
     setlocal textwidth=78
@@ -224,9 +219,10 @@ if &filetype == "changelog"
   setlocal comments=
   setlocal formatoptions+=t
   setlocal noexpandtab
-  " setlocal autoindent     now in indent file
+  setlocal autoindent
 
-  let &cpo = cpo_save
+  let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+  unlet s:cpo_save
 else
   " Add the Changelog opening mapping
   nmap <silent> <Leader>o :call <SID>open_changelog()<CR>
@@ -234,23 +230,21 @@ else
   function! s:open_changelog()
     if filereadable('ChangeLog')
       if bufloaded('ChangeLog')
-	let buf = bufnr('ChangeLog')
-	execute "normal! \<C-W>t"
-	while winbufnr(winnr()) != buf
-	  execute "normal! \<C-W>w"
-	endwhile
+        let buf = bufnr('ChangeLog')
+        execute "normal! \<C-W>t"
+        while winbufnr(winnr()) != buf
+          execute "normal! \<C-W>w"
+        endwhile
       else
-	split ChangeLog
+        split ChangeLog
       endif
 
       if exists("g:mapleader")
-	execute "normal " . g:mapleader . "o"
+        execute "normal " . g:mapleader . "o"
       else
-	execute "normal \\o"
+        execute "normal \\o"
       endif
       startinsert!
     endif
   endfunction
 endif
-
-" vim: set sts=2 sw=2:

runtime/ftplugin/conf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         generic configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/context.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         ConTeXt typesetting engine
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< def< inc< sua< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:%,b:%D,b:%C,b:%M commentstring=%\ %s formatoptions+=tcroql
+
+let &l:define='\\\%([egx]\|char\|mathchar\|count\|dimen\|muskip\|skip\|toks\)\='
+        \ .     'def\|\\font\|\\\%(future\)\=let'
+        \ . '\|\\new\%(count\|dimen\|skip\|muskip\|box\|toks\|read\|write'
+        \ .     '\|fam\|insert\|if\)'
+
+let &l:include = '^\s*\%(input\|component\)'
+
+setlocal suffixesadd=.tex
+
+if exists("loaded_matchit")
+  let b:match_ignorecase = 0
+  let b:match_skip = 'r:\\\@<!\%(\\\\\)*%'
+  let b:match_words = '(:),\[:],{:},\\(:\\),\\\[:\\],' .
+        \ '\\start\(\a\+\):\\stop\1'
+endif " exists("loaded_matchit")
+
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/ftplugin/crm.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         CRM114
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/css.vim

@@ -1,20 +1,16 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
-" Language:	    CSS
-" Maintainer:	    Nikolai Weibull <source@pcppopper.org>
-" URL:		    http://www.pcppopper.org/vim/ftplugin/pcp/css/
-" Latest Revision:  2004-04-25
-" arch-tag:	    5fa7c74f-bf1a-47c4-b06f-6efe8f48db3b
+" Language:         CSS
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
 
-" Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
   finish
 endif
-
-" Don't load another plugin for this buffer
 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 
-let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com<"
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
 
-setlocal comments=s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/
+setlocal comments=s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/ commentstring&
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
 
-" vim: set sts=2 sw=2:
+let &l:include = '^\s*@import\s\+\%(url(\)\='

runtime/ftplugin/cvsrc.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         cvs(1) RC file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments= commentstring= formatoptions-=tcroql

runtime/ftplugin/dictconf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         dict(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-30
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/dictdconf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         dictd(8) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-01
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/diff.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:	Diff
+" Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+" Last Change:	2005 Jul 27
+
+" Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl modeline<"
+
+" Don't use modelines in a diff, they apply to the diffed file
+setlocal nomodeline

runtime/ftplugin/dircolors.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         dircolors(1) input file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/elinks.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         elinks(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/eterm.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         eterm(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s include=^\\s*include
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/fetchmail.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         fetchmail(1) RC File
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/gpg.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         gpg(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/group.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         group(5) user group file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments= commentstring= formatoptions-=tcroq formatoptions+=l

runtime/ftplugin/grub.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         grub(8) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/haskell.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         Haskell
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_plugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=s1fl:{-,mb:-,ex:-},:-- commentstring=--\ %s
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/help.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         Vim help file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-29
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_plugin = "setl fo< tw<"
+
+setlocal formatoptions+=tcroql textwidth=78

runtime/ftplugin/indent.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         indent(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/ commentstring&
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/ld.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         ld(1) script
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/ commentstring=/*%s*/ include=^\\s*INCLUDE
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/lftp.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         lftp(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/libao.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         libao.conf(5) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/limits.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         limits(5) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/loginaccess.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         login.access(5) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/logindefs.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         login.defs(5) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/m4.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         m4
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:#,:dnl commentstring=dnl\ %s
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/mailcap.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         Mailcap configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/manconf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         man.conf(5) - man configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-30
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/mf.vim

@@ -1,16 +1,14 @@
-" Vim filetype plugin
-" Language:	METAFONT
-" Maintainer:	Dorai Sitaram <ds26@gte.com>
-" URL:		http://www.ccs.neu.edu/~dorai/vimplugins/vimplugins.html
-" Last Change:	May 27, 2003
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         MetaFont
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
 
-" Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
   finish
 endif
-
-" Don't load another plugin for this buffer
 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 
-setl com=:%
-setl fo-=t
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:% commentstring=%\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
+

runtime/ftplugin/modconf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         modules.conf(5) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s include=^\\s*include
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/mp.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,22 @@
-" Vim filetype plugin
-" Language:	MetaPost
-" Maintainer:	Dorai Sitaram <ds26@gte.com>
-" URL:		http://www.ccs.neu.edu/~dorai/vimplugins/vimplugins.html
-" Last Change:	May 27, 2003
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         MetaPost
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
 
-runtime! ftplugin/mf.vim ftplugin/mf_*.vim ftplugin/mf/*.vim
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:% commentstring=%\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
+
+if !exists(":FixBeginfigs") != 2
+  command -nargs=0 FixBeginfigs call s:fix_beginfigs()
+
+  function! s:fix_beginfigs()
+    let i = 1
+    g/^beginfig(\d*);$/s//\='beginfig('.i.');'/ | let i = i + 1
+  endfunction
+endif

runtime/ftplugin/mplayerconf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         mplayer(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s include=^\\s*include
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/mupad.vim

@@ -1,30 +1,30 @@
-" Vim filetype plugin file
-" Language:    MuPAD source files
-" Maintainer:  Dave Silvia <dsilvia@mchsi.com>
-" Filenames:   *.mu
-" Date:        6/30/2004
-
-if exists("b:did_ftplugin") | finish | endif
-let b:did_ftplugin = 1
-
-" Change the :browse e filter to primarily show MuPAD source files.
-if has("gui_win32")
-  let  b:browsefilter=
-		\ "MuPAD source (*.mu)\t*.mu\n" .
-		\	"All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
-endif
-
-" matchit.vim not loaded -- don't do anyting below
-if !exists("loaded_matchit")
-	" echomsg "matchit.vim not loaded -- finishing"
-	finish
-endif
-
-" source the AppendMatchGroup function file
-runtime ftplugin/AppendMatchGroup.vim
-
-" fill b:match_words for MuPAD
-call AppendMatchGroup('domain,end_domain')
-call AppendMatchGroup('proc,begin,end_proc')
-call AppendMatchGroup('if,then,elif,else,end_if')
-call AppendMatchGroup('\%(for\|while\|repeat\|case\),of,do,break,next,until,\%(end_for\|end_while\|end_repeat\|end_case\)')
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:    MuPAD source files
+" Maintainer:  Dave Silvia <dsilvia@mchsi.com>
+" Filenames:   *.mu
+" Date:        6/30/2004
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin") | finish | endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+" Change the :browse e filter to primarily show MuPAD source files.
+if has("gui_win32")
+  let  b:browsefilter=
+		\ "MuPAD source (*.mu)\t*.mu\n" .
+		\	"All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
+endif
+
+" matchit.vim not loaded -- don't do anyting below
+if !exists("loaded_matchit")
+	" echomsg "matchit.vim not loaded -- finishing"
+	finish
+endif
+
+" source the AppendMatchGroup function file
+runtime ftplugin/AppendMatchGroup.vim
+
+" fill b:match_words for MuPAD
+call AppendMatchGroup('domain,end_domain')
+call AppendMatchGroup('proc,begin,end_proc')
+call AppendMatchGroup('if,then,elif,else,end_if')
+call AppendMatchGroup('\%(for\|while\|repeat\|case\),of,do,break,next,until,\%(end_for\|end_while\|end_repeat\|end_case\)')

runtime/ftplugin/muttrc.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         mutt RC File
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
+
+let &l:include = '^\s*source\>'

runtime/ftplugin/nanorc.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         nanorc(5) - GNU nano configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-30
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/netrc.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         netrc(5) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments= commentstring= formatoptions-=tcroq formatoptions+=l

runtime/ftplugin/pamconf.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         pam(8) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/passwd.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         passwd(5) password file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments= commentstring= formatoptions-=tcroq formatoptions+=l

runtime/ftplugin/pinfo.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         pinfo(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/procmail.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         procmail(1) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< inc< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
+
+let &l:include = '^\s*INCLUDERC\>'

runtime/ftplugin/prolog.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         Prolog
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,:% commentstring=%\ %s
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/protocols.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         protocols(5) - Internet protocols definition file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-06-30
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/quake.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         Quake[1-3] configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:// commentstring=//\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/racc.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         Racc input file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,:# commentstring=#\ %s
+setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/readline.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         readline(3) configuration file
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql

runtime/ftplugin/rnc.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:         Relax NG compact syntax
+" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <nikolai+work.vim@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:  2005-07-04
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
+
+setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql